Pioneer DVR-450H-S Operating instructions

Add to My manuals
137 Pages

advertisement

Pioneer DVR-450H-S Operating instructions | Manualzz
00 Cover_back_TLTFWPW_EN.fm 1 ページ 2007年2月23日 金曜日 午前11時41分
HDD/DVD RECORDER
HDD/DVD Recorder
Operating Instructions
DVR-650H-S
DVR-550H-S
DVR-450H-S
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
TM
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
Operating Instructions
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
Printed in China
K002_B_En
<VRB1463-A>
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 2 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.
After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
WARNING
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filed
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
or moisture.
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product
contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or
attempt to gain access to the rear of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location: inside of the unit
CAUTION
ATTENTION
ADVARSEL
VARNING
VORSICHT
PRECAUCIÓN
VARO!
VRW2262 - A
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.
BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN VORHANDEN.
NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN!
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 3 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
(for example, when on vacation).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.
POWER-CORD CAUTION
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).
For Taiwan exclusively
Taiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
DVR650HK_TLT_ENTOC.fm 4 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後4時49分
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Recording
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Putting the batteries in the remote
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Disc/content format playback
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . .
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the picture quality/
recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous recording and playback
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording from an external
component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic recording from a satellite
tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . .
DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02 Connections
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using other types of video output . . . . . . 17
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting to an AV amplifier or
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 30
4
En
33
34
35
35
36
37
38
39
47
47
48
49
50
51
06 Playback
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . .
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . .
Switching DVD and DivX
soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying disc information
on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
56
57
57
58
58
60
61
61
62
62
DVR650HK_TLT_ENTOC.fm 5 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後4時49分
07 Playing and recording from a DV
camcorder
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 64
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 64
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
08 Editing
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
09 Copying and backup
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
10 Using the Jukebox
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Copying files via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 90
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
11 The PhotoViewer
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Changing the display style of the
PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Reloading files from a disc or
USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Importing files to the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selecting multiple files or folders . . . . . . 95
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 96
Copying selected files to a
DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
101
101
101
102
13 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
14 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 106
Selecting other languages for
language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
15 Additional information
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
If the picture freezes and the front panel
and remote control buttons stop
working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Front-panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Setting up the remote to control
your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 132
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 6 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
01
Before you start
Chapter 1
Before you start
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following
accessories are in the box when you open it:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote control
AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2
Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
RF antenna cable
Power cable
These operating instructions
• When disposing of used batteries,
please comply with governmental
regulations or environmental public
instruction’s rules that apply in your
country or area.
WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
D3-4-2-3-3_En
life or performance of batteries.
Using the remote control
Putting the batteries in the
remote control
• Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the
battery compartment following the
indications (,) inside the
compartment.
Important
Incorrect use of batteries can result in
hazards such as leakage and bursting.
Please observe the following:
6
En
• Don’t mix new and old batteries
together.
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries
together — although they may look
similar, different batteries may have
different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends
of each battery match the indications in
the battery compartment.
• Remove batteries from equipment that
isn’t going to be used for a month or
more.
Please keep in mind the following when
using the remote control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles
between the remote and the remote
sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become
unreliable if strong sunlight or
fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• Remote controllers for different devices
can interfere with each other. Avoid
using remotes for other equipment
located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a
fall off in the operating range of the
remote.
• When the batteries run down or you
change the batteries, the remote control
mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote
Control Mode on page 116.
• Use within the operating range in front of
the remote control sensor on the front
panel, as shown.
7m
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 7 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Before you start
• You can control this recorder using the
remote sensor of another Pioneer
component via the CONTROL IN jack on
the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 14 for more
information.
Disc/content format playback
compatibility
01
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD
recorders’ limited compatibility with DVDRW ver. 1.2 discs.
Model
DVR-7000
DVR-310
DVR-510H
Playable
*1,2,3
Yes
Yes*1
Recordable
No
No
*1
Compatible media
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 /
2x to 4x / 2x to 6x
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x
to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x
to 16x
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to
3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x
Note that older models of DVD recorders
and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2
discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If
you want to share DVD-RW discs between
this recorder and an older recorder/writer,
we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before
playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs
may not play.
*2
Cannot read the CPRM information will show in
the display when you load a disc. However, this will not
affect playback.
*3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
Readable file system
This recorder can play DVDs recorded under
the following file systems1: ISO 9660*, UDF
1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and
Joliet file systems are both compatible with
this recorder.
Note
1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play
correctly.
• MP3/WMA files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video files and uses the UDF
1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems.
7
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 8 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
01
Before you start
HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility
This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides
HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between
the different disc types.
HDD
Marks used in this
manual
HDD
DVD-R
DVD (VR)
DVD-RW
DVD (Video)
*1
DVD (VR)
DVD (Video)
*1
*2
DVD+R
DVD
+RW
DVDRAM
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
*13, 16
Logos
Re-recordable/
Erasable
*3
*3
*3
*14
Editing of recorded
programmes
*4
*4
*4
*4
Recording of Copyonce protected
material
*12
Playback in other
players/recorders
n/a
*5
Chase play
16:9 and 4:3
programme
recording
Dual mono/
Bilingual broadcast *10, 11
recording of both
audio channels
*12
*6
En
*6
*6, 15
*8
*9
*11
*11
*11
Notes to table
8
*7
*12
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 101).
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording
(page 101).
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist
editing.
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback.
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in
some units) (page 49).
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback.
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off (page 113).
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only
Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work
reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may
become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available
recording time, nor increase the number of recordable
titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized
before it can be recorded (page 101). In this case,
initialization will take about an hour.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 9 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Before you start
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL
(Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable
layers on a single side, giving about 1.8
times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can
record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL
discs.
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video
mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on
this unit on other DVD recorders/players,
you must finalize them. (Note that some
DVD recorders/players may not play
even finalized DL discs.)
• This logo indicates that the disc is a
DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:
01
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this
product. DVD-Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the
DualDisc specification, please refer to the
disc manufacturer or disc retailer.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is
compatible with a wide range of disc types
(media) and formats. Playable discs will
generally feature one of the logos on the disc
and/or disc packaging shown below. Note
however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an
unplayable format — see below for further
compatibility information.
Audio CD
Correct operation has been confirmed for
DL discs:
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
That’s
JVC
• DVD+R DL 2.4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
About DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side
of which contains DVD content –video,
audio, etc. –while the other side contains
non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not
compliant with the CD Audio specification
and therefore may not play.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being
played will be scratched. Scratched discs
may not be playable.
Video CD
CD-R
CD-RW
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
CD-R/-RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW
discs.
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/
Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM*
containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both
compatible with this recorder.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CDAudio and Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio
only
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: DVD-ROM,
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM,
CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only: USB
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio
(WMA)
9
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 10 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
01
Before you start
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or
48 kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher
recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback:
Yes
• VBR WMA playback: No
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows
Media Codec 8 (files encoded using
Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable
but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,
Voice and VBR)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)1 file
playback: No
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must
be used for the recorder to recognize
MP3 and WMA files – do not use for
other file types)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders/999 files
(if these limits are exceeded, only files
and folders up to these limits are
playable)
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)
compatibility
This recorder can playback Windows Media
Audio content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media
Audio and refers to an audio compression
technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA content can be encoded
by using Windows Media Player for
Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or
Windows Media Player 10 series.
DivX video compatibility
DivX is a compressed digital video format
created by the DivX® video codec from DivX,
Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files
burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping
the same terminology as DVD-Video,
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc
prior to burning, keep in mind that by default
they will be played in alphabetical order.
• Official DivX® Certified product.
• Plays all versions of DivX® video
(including DivX® 6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files.
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these
must be used for the recorder to
recognize DivX video files). Note that all
files with the .avi extension are recognized
as MPEG4, but not all of these are
necessarily DivX video files and therefore
may not be playable on this recorder.
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999
files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or
distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, Inc.
10
En
Note
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your
PC and/or software.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 11 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Before you start
DivX® VOD content
DivX
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this recorder, you first need to
register the recorder with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Some DivX VOD content may only be
playable a fixed number of times. When you
load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD
content, the remaining number of plays is
shown on-screen and you then have the
option of playing the disc (thereby using up
one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If
you load a disc that contains expired DivX
VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental
Expired is displayed.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited
number of plays, then you may load the disc
into your recorder and play the content as
often as you like, and no message will be
displayed.
01
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif
(must be used for the recorder to
recognize JPEG files – do not use for
other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up
to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there
are more files/folders that this on the disc
then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer
may not be playable in this unit due to the
setting of the application software used to
create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher
for more detailed information.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF
format) are not compatible with this
recorder.
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW
software disc boxes for additional
compatibility information.
Dolby Digital
Important
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM
system. This restricts playback of
content to specific, registered devices.
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD
content not authorized for this recorder,
the message Authorization Error is
displayed and the content will not play.
• Resetting the recorder (as described in
Resetting the recorder on page 134) will
not cause you to lose your registration
code.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and
EXIF 2.2* still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
11
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 12 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
01
Before you start
About the internal hard disk
drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile
piece of equipment. When used without the
proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is
possible that recorded contents may be
damaged or lost entirely, in some cases
making even normal playback or recording
impossible. Please understand that in the
event of repair or replacement of the HDD or
related components, all your HDD
recordings will be lost.
Please use the recorder following the
guidelines below to protect against possible
HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to
store recordings permanently. We
recommend that you back up your important
recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect
against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of
recorded material resulting from HDD failure.
• Install and use the recorder on a stable,
level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively
hot or humid places, or in places that
may be subject to sudden changes in
temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to
form inside the recorder. This can be a
cause of HDD failure.
• Do not move the recorder immediately
after switching it off. If you need to move
the recorder, please follow the steps
below:
1 After the message POWER OFF is
shown on the front panel display, wait at
least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
12
En
• If there’s a power failure while the
recorder is on there is a chance that
some data on the HDD will be lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used over
time in an improper manner or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible
that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing
and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in
the picture. However, sometimes there
will be no warning signs of HDD failure.
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded
material will be possible. In this case it
will be necessary to replace the HDD
unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD,
the data on the disk becomes fragmented,
eventually affecting the recorder’s
performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to
optimize the HDD (which you can do from
the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on
page 101).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 13 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Before you start
01
Symbols used in this manual
The following icons are provided to help you
quickly identify which instructions you need
for which kind of disc.
HDD
HDD
DVD
Any type of DVD disc
(recordable or playback
only), finalized or not.
DVD-Video
Commercially produced
DVD, finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)
Video mode DVD-R/-RW
(unfinalized)
DVD (VR)
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
CD
Audio CD
Video CD
Video CD
Super VCD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
DivX
DivX files
ALL
All of the above
13
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 14 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
02
Connections
Chapter 2
Connections
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
4
5
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
6
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
7
8
9
1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA
IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through
to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to
your TV.
2 INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
inputs for connection to a satellite receiver,
set top box, etc.
3 OUTPUT 2
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
outputs for connection to a TV or AV
amplifier/receiver.
4 HDMI OUT
HDMI output for high quality digital audio
and video.
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to
an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS
decoder or other equipment with a digital
input.
6 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
inputs for connection to a satellite receiver,
set top box, etc.
14
En
10
7 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to
a TV or monitor with a component video
input.
8 OUTPUT 1
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
outputs for connection to a TV or AV
amplifier/receiver.
9 CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component with a
CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the
Pioneer mark. Connect the CONTROL
OUT of the other component to the
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a miniplug cord.
10 AC IN – Power inlet
Connect to a power outlet using the supplied
power cable after making all other
connections.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 15 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
Front panel connections
On the front panel there is a flip-down cover
that hides more connections.
Left side:
DV IN
11
USB
12
13
11 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for
connecting a DV camcorder.
12 USB port (Type B)
(DVR-650H-S, DVR-550H-S only)
USB port for connecting a PictBridgecompatible printer or PC.
13 USB port (Type A)
(DVR-650H-S, DVR-550H-S only)
USB port for connecting a digital camera,
keyboard or other USB device.
Right side:
INPUT 2
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
14
14 INPUT 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio;
composite and S-video), especially suitable
for camcorders, game consoles, portable
audio, etc.
15
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 16 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
Easy connections
The setup described here is a basic
configuration that allows you to record TV
programmes on both this recorder and your
VCR. When watching recordings from this
recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to
input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR.
Important
• This recorder is equipped with copy
protection technology. Do not connect
this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your
VCR via this recorder) using AV cables,
as the picture from this recorder will not
appear properly on your TV.
• Before making or changing any rear
panel connections, make sure that all
components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
ANTENNA
OUT
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
4
2
To antenna input
From audio/
video output
From antenna output
VCR
3
5
To audio/
video input
To antenna input
To audio/video input
TV
16
En
1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV
outlet to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on
this recorder.
2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is
supplied) to connect the ANTENNA OUT
jack on this recorder to the antenna input
on your VCR.
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the
chain, connect this recorder directly to
your TV and skip the next step.
3 Use an RF antenna cable to connect
the antenna output on your VCR to the
antenna input on your TV.
4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/
video inputs on your TV.
Use the supplied three-pin audio/video
cable. It is colour-coded to help you match
them up (red/white for the right/left audio
connections and yellow for video in/outs).
Make sure you match up the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for
correct stereo sound.
5 Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN
2 above) using a set of audio and video
cables.
• See the following page if you want to use
S-video or component video cables for
the video connection.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 17 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
Using other types of video
output
1 Connecting using an S-video output
S-video carries the picture as separate
colour and luminance (brightness) signals.
This recorder has standard (composite),
S-video and component video outputs. The
main difference between them is the quality
of the picture. S-video delivers a better
picture than composite video, while
component video gives better picture quality
still. The variety of outputs also gives you the
flexibility of connecting your particular
equipment using the best connection type
available.
There are two S-video outputs for connection
to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment.
To component video input
To S-video input
1
2
TV
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
• Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to
connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to
an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or
other equipment).
2 Connecting using the component
video output
Component video carries the picture as two
separate colour signals, plus a luminance
(brightness) signal.
See also Component Video Out on page 108
for how to set up the component video
output for use with a progressive scancompatible TV.
• Use a component video cable (not
supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video
input on your TV, monitor (or other
equipment).
17
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 18 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
02
Connections
Connecting to a cable box or
satellite receiver (1)
1
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record unscrambled channels by
selecting them on this recorder.
• Record scrambled channels by selecting
them on the cable box/satellite receiver
and using the Auto Start Recording
feature (see Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner on page 48).
• Watch one channel while recording
another.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.
Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
If you are using a cable box or satellite
receiver with only a few scrambled channels,
follow the setup on this page1. If many or all
the channels are scrambled, we recommend
using the setup on the following page.
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
ANTENNA
OUT
1
OUTPUT 1
INPUT 1/AUTO
START REC
3
To antenna input
From antenna output
Cable box/
Satellite receiver
1
From audio/
video output
2
To antenna input
To audio/video input
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).
This enables you to watch the output from
this recorder.
3 Connect the audio/video output of
your cable box/satellite receiver to the
INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set
of A/V cables.
This enables you to record scrambled TV
channels.
18
En
Note
1 The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video
connections if they’re available.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 19 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
Connecting to a cable box or
satellite receiver (2)
If many or all the channels you receive by
cable or satellite are scrambled, we
recommend using this setup.1
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
From audio/
video output
To antenna input
From antenna output
Cable box/
Satellite receiver
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on
the cable box/satellite receiver.
3
INPUT 1/AUTO
START REC
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
• Record using the Auto Start Recording
feature (see Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner on page 48).
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.
Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
ANTENNA
OUT
Important
AUDIO
R
R
OUT
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
2
1
To audio/video input
To antenna input
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Connect the audio/video output of
your cable box/satellite receiver to the
INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set
of A/V cables.
This enables you to record scrambled TV
channels.
Note
1 • The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another.
• The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video
connections if they’re available.
19
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 20 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
02
Connections
Connecting to an AV
amplifier or receiver
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you
need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/
receiver using the digital coaxial output. In
addition to the digital connection, we
recommend also connecting using the
stereo analog connection.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video
output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the
standard (composite) video output (as
shown here), or the S-video or component
video connections.
See also Audio Out on page 109 for how to
set up the digital audio output. (Noise may
be output from your speakers if the recorder
is not set up to work with your AV amp/
receiver.)
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV
‘through’ your VCR or other component
using A/V cables. Always connect it
directly to your TV.
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
ANTENNA
OUT
OUTPUT 1
1
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
2
To audio/video input
AV amp/
receiver
To digital input
3
From video
output
4
To video input
To antenna input
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to
a set of audio/video inputs on your AV
amp/receiver.
3 Use an coaxial digital audio cable (not
supplied) to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to
an coaxial digital input on your AV amp/
receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel
surround sound.1
4 Connect the AV amp/receiver’s video
output to a video input on your TV.
20
En
Note
1 If your AV amp/receiver doesn’t have an coaxial digital input, but has a optical type, converter boxes that convert
from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 21 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped1
monitor or display2, you can connect it to
this recorder using an HDMI cable (not
supplied).
The HDMI connector outputs
uncompressed digital video, as well as
almost every kind of digital audio.
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to
an HDMI connector on an HDMIcompatible display.
To HDMI
input
HDMI-compatible display
HDMI
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AC IN
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
• The arrow on the cable connector body
should be face down for correct
alignment with the connector on the
recorder.
When connected to an HDMI component or
HDCP-compatible DVI component, the
HDMI indicator lights.
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There
are however settings you can change if you
need to. See HDMI Output (only available
when an HDMI device is connected) on
page 114 for more information. Note that the
HDMI settings remain in effect until you
change them, or connect a new HDMI
component.
Important
• An HDMI connection can only be made
with DVI-equipped components
compatible with both DVI and
High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to
connect to a DVI connector, you will
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI
to HDCP connection, however, does not
support audio. Consult your local audio
dealer for more information.
• The HDMI connection is compatible with
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/
20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM
signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and
MPEG audio bitstream.
• If your connected component is only
compatible with Linear PCM, the signal
is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is
not output).
• If you have connected to a Pioneer
plasma display, please select the HDMI
setup on the display (refer to the
supplied manual for more on this).
About HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface) supports both video and audio on
a single digital connection for use with DVD
players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed
to provide the technologies of
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to
protect digital content transmitted and
received by DVI-compliant displays.
Note
1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal
transfers.
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p,
1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible
with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.
21
En
02 Connecting _Up_EU.fm 22 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後5時33分
02
Connections
HDMI has the capability to support
standard, enhanced, or high-definition video
plus standard to multi-channel surroundsound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of
up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link),
one connector (instead of several cables and
connectors), and communication between
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.
HDMI Control
By connecting this unit to an
HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma
television or AV system (amplifier or AV
receiver etc.) with an HDMI cable, you can
control this unit from the remote control of a
connected plasma television, as well as have
the connected plasma television
automatically change inputs in response to
this unit starting playback.
Refer to the operating manual for your
plasma television or AV system for more
information about which operations can be
carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.
Auto-select function
You can have a connected plasma television or
AV system automatically change inputs when
playback begins on this unit (including when
you have a GUI (such as Disc Navigator) set to
display on this unit). Certain connected
plasma televisions may have their power
turned from off to on when using this function.
Simultaneous power function
You can have this unit turn on automatically
when the power for a connected plasma
television is turned on. To have this unit’s
power turned off when a connected plasma
television is turned off, you must change the
simultaneous power function of your plasma
television.
22
En
Unified language function
By receiving language information from a
connected plasma television, you can have
this unit’s language settings automatically
change to those of the plasma television
(language information can be received only
when no media is being played back and no
recordings are taking place, or when you
choose not to display this unit’s GUI
displays). Refer to your plasma television’s
operating manual for more information
regarding how your plasma television
transmits language information.
Setup Navigator
Language information is imported from your
plasma television before you begin Setup
Navigator (see Switching on and setting up
on page 30).
Important
• Controls may not function properly in
certain situations, such as immediately
after you have connect an HDMI cable,
change connection settings, turn this
unit’s power off or remove the power
cable for this unit or the connected
component. If you experience any
problems, turn the HDMI control for all
connected units ON and check the video
output from this unit.
• You cannot use the Auto Start Recording
function (see Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner on page 48) if you have this
unit’s power set to turn on
simultaneously with a plasma television.
If you do not want this unit to turn on
automatically when you turn the power
to your plasma television, set this unit’s
HDMI Control to OFF (page 115).
• When a scheduled recording finishes,
this unit’s power is not turned off if the
power for the plasma television is on.
• Even if you make Child Lock settings (see
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock) on page 46),
this unit can still be controlled by the
remote of a connected plasma
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 23 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
television. If you do not want this unit to
be able to be controlled by another
component when you have set a Child
Lock, turn this unit’s HDMI Control to
OFF (page 115).
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work
with HDMI control-compatible
components other than those made by
Pioneer.
Connecting other AV sources
DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
DivX
DV IN
COPY
HDMI
INPUT 2
USB
CH
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
Connecting a DV camcorder
You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD
recorder with DV output to the front panel
DV IN jack.
Important
Connecting a VCR or analog
camcorder
STANDBY/ON
• When connecting an external AV source
that only supports monaural sound, only
insert the left (white) audio jack to this
device. Doing so will allow the same
sound track to be recorded to both
channels. You must connect to the
INPUT 2 jack on the front panel.
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
• This jack is for connection to DV
equipment only. It is not compatible with
digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video
decks.
DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
(Front panel)
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
(Rear panel)
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
DivX
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
COPY
HDMI
INPUT 2
USB
CH
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
DV
IN
1
2
From DV output
To audio/video input
Analog camcorder
From audio/video output
VCR
1 Connect a set of audio and video
inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set
of outputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder
to your VCR or camcorder.
DV camcorder
• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to
connect the DV jack of your DV
camcorder to the front panel DV IN
jack of this recorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video
cables for the video connection.
2 Connect a set of audio and video
outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a
set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your
VCR or camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video
cables for the video connection.
• The front panel connections make
convenient connections for a camcorder
input.
23
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 24 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
02
Connections
Connecting a USB device
WMA/MP3 file storage devices
(DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only)
Using the USB ports on the front of the
recorder you can connect USB devices such
as digital cameras, printers, keyboards and
PCs. Please also see the instructions that
came with the device you want to connect
before using.
• Memory card reader (any type of
memory card)
• USB memory
• PC (Use Connect PC function)
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the
device is partitioned, this recorder may not
recognize it.
DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
DivX
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
COPY
HDMI
INPUT 2
USB
CH
USB
(Type B)
USB
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
USB
(Type A)
Note that although multi-slot card readers
can be used, the recorder will only recognize
the first card inserted. To read another card,
remove all the cards and insert the card to be
read again.
USB
Using a USB hub
Digital Camera
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
Keyboard
PC
Important
• Some USB devices may not work with
this recorder.
• When connecting a PC to this unit, make
sure the power is turned off on both the
PC and this unit when you connect them
via USB.
• We recommend connecting USB
devices when this recorder is switched
off (in standby).
JPEG file storage devices
• Digital still camera
• Memory card reader (any type of
memory card)
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the
device is partitioned, this recorder may not
recognize it.
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be
used to transfer up to maximum 4000 files.
24
En
• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/
or 2.0.
• Use an independently powered hub (bus
powered hubs may not work reliably).
• In the event of unreliable operation with
the hub, we recommend plugging the
device directly into the recorder’s USB
port.
• Operation may become unreliable if too
many devices are connected to the hub.
In this case, try unplugging some
devices.
• If the power delivered through a hub is
insufficient for the devices connected,
communication can become unreliable.
In this case, disconnect one or more
devices then perform a USB restart. (See
Restart USB Device on page 116.)
Using a USB printer
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Using a USB keyboard
• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected
using a PS/2-USB adapter.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 25 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Connections
02
Using a PC
• Note that you can connect a PC to this
device via USB to copy WMA and MP3
files. For more information, see Connect
PC on page 88. To use Connect PC with
this device, your PC must run either the
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2) or
Windows XP Professional (SP2)
operating system and be able to run
Windows Media Player 10. Even if your
PC can run Windows Media Player 10,
we cannot guarantee that it will function
properly with this device. For more
details see the ‘Help’ section of Windows
Media Player 10.
Plugging in
After checking all the connections, plug in
the recorder.
• Use the supplied power cable to
connect this recorder to a power outlet.
25
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 26 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
03
Controls and displays
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Front panel
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
DivX
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
COPY
HDMI
INPUT 2
USB
CH
9
10
1 DivX indicator
Lights when this recorder plays DivX video
files.
2 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for
recording and playback.
3 COPY indicator
Lights when copying is underway.
4 Disc tray
5 HDD/DVD indicator
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk
(HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD
drive is selected.
6 OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
7 HDMI indicator
Lights when this recorder is connected to
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.
8 Front panel display and IR remote
sensor
See Display on page 27 for details.
9 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
10 Front panel inputs
See Front panel connections on page 15 for
more information on these.
26
En
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
11
VIDEO
L(MONO)
10
R
AUDIO
REC
12
11 Press to start or restart playback.
Press to stop playback.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
ONE TOUCH COPY
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the
HDD.
CH +/–
Use to change channels, skip chapters/
tracks, etc.
INPUT SELECT
Press to change the input used for
recording.
REC MODE
Press repeatedly to cycle through
recording modes (picture quality).
12 REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to
set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 27 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
2 3
5
4
6
PM
L R
10 9
8
7
1 Lights during playback; blinks when
playback is paused.
6
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
SP (standard play).
3 Lights during recording; blinks when
recording is paused.
LP/SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
LP (long play) or SLP (super long play).
4 PM
Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the
clock display.
(page 39)
Lights when a timer recording has been
set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been
set to DVD but there isn’t a recordable
disc loaded, or the timer has been set to
HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
NTSC
Lights when the video output signal
format is NTSC.
(page 109)
Taiwan and Philippines model:
Indicates which channels are recorded
when dual mono is selected.
Other:
Indicates which channels of a bilingual
broadcast are recorded.
(page 108)
Lights when the component video output
is set to progressive scan (except in
some cases when a component is
connected using HDMI).
SAP (page 36) (Taiwan and Philippines
model only)
Lights when the currently selected TV
channel has a Secondary Audio
Programme channel.
Recording quality indicators (page 37)
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
XP (best quality).
2 Lights when copying.
5
P
EP/SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
EP (extended play) or SEP (super
extended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to
MN (manual recording level) mode.
7
Character display
8 R/RW
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded:
DVD-R or DVD-RW.
9 AUTO
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been
set, and during Auto Start Recording.
10 PL (page 68)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded
and the recorder is in Play List mode.
2 3 (page 116)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing
is displayed, the remote control mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode
disc is loaded.
27
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 28 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
03
Controls and displays
Remote control
6 DVD
Press to select the DVD for recording or
playback.
1
5
8
10
11
ONE TOUCH
COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
INPUT
SELECT
CH
WXYZ
G-CODE +
15
9
CLEAR
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
PLAY MODE
Use the + button to enter non-alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
12
MENU
14
TOP MENU
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
17
HELP
REV SCAN
PAUSE
PREV
DISPLAY
PLAY
STOP
CASE
SELECTION
REC
21
8 Alphanumeric buttons, + and CLEAR
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/
title selection; channel selection, and so on.
The same buttons can also be used to enter
names for titles, discs and so on.
7
CLEAR
16
20
4
6
DVD
ABC
DISC NAVIGATOR
13
7 INPUT SELECT (page 47)
Press to change the input to use for
recording.
2
STANDBY/ON
3
OK
NEXT
STOP REC
19
18
FWD SCAN
BACK
CM
SKIP
STEP/SLOW
REC MODE
TIMER REC
TV CONTROL
22
INPUT
SELECT
CHANNEL
9 CH +/– (page 36)
Press to change the channel of the built-in
TV tuner.
VOLUME
10 G-Code™ (page 41)
Press then use the number buttons to enter
a G-Code programming number for timer
recording.
G-Code is a trademark of Gemstar
Development Corporation.
The G-Code system is manufactured
under license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
1 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 79)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.
2 Remote control indicator
Lights when setting up the remote control
for use with a TV (page 130) and when
setting the remote control mode (page 116).
3 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
4 OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
5 HDD
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for
recording or playback.
28
En
11 DVD playback functions
AUDIO (page 36, 61)
Changes the audio language or channel.
(When the recorder is stopped, press to
change the tuner audio.)
SUBTITLE (page 60)
Displays/changes the subtitles included
in multilingual DVD-Video discs.
ANGLE (page 62)
Switches camera angles on discs with
multi-angle scenes.
12 PLAY MODE (page 58)
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for
features such as search, repeat and
programme play).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 29 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Controls and displays
13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 56, 68)/
TOP MENU (page 53)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.
14 MENU (page 53)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVDVideo disc is loaded.
15 /// and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.
Press ENTER to select the currently
highlighted option.
16 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from
which you can navigate all the functions of
the recorder.
17 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen
menu or display.
18 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI
screen.
19 DISPLAY (page 62)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
20 Playback controls (page 52)
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
(page 57)
Press to start reverse or forward
scanning. Press again to change the
speed.
PLAY
Press to start playback.
03
STOP
Press to stop playback.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively
backward through the video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively
forward through the video playing.
PREV NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/
chapter/track/folder; or to display the
previous or next menu page.
STEP/SLOW (page 57)
During playback, press to start slowmotion playback; while paused, press to
show the previous or next video frame.
21 Recording controls (page 38)
REC
Press to start recording. Press
repeatedly to set the recording time in
blocks of 30 mins.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE (page 37)
Press repeatedly to change the
recording mode (picture quality).
TIMER REC (page 39)
Press to start setting a timer recording.
22 TV CONTROL (page 130)
After setting up, use these controls to
control your TV.
PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
29
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 30 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
4
ENTER
When you switch the recorder on for the first
time, you can make several basic settings
using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes
you through setting the clock, the internal TV
tuner and the video output.
Start the Setup Navigator.
k Setting
t Line Complete
System this setup before you
start using your recorder.
er Save
Start
P
p Navigator Cancel
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time,
we strongly recommend you use the Setup
Navigator before starting to use the
recorder.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup
Navigator, press to select Cancel,
then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
Important
• Some of the Setup Navigator on-screen
displays (OSDs) in this section vary
slightly depending on the country or
region of purchase.
ENTER
5
Select an option then press
ENTER.
Taiwan and Philippines model:
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan
and Philippines model.
1 Switch on your TV and set the video
input to this recorder.
k Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Line System
er Save
English
Antenna
P
Cable
p Navigator Do not Set
Other:
STANDBY/ON
2
Switch on the recorder.
k Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Line System
When you switch on for the first time, your
TV should display the Setup Navigator
screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t
appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 106).
er Save
English
Auto
Scan
P
Do not Set
• Select Do not set if you want to skip
channel setup (because they have
already been set up, for example).
• You can go back to the previous screen
in the Setup Navigator by pressing
RETURN.
ENTER
3
Choose a language (then
press ENTER).
ENTER
Language
English
Italiano
Español
Português
•
Select your country.
k Setting
Country Selection
t Line System
er Save
Country
P
30
En
Singapore
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 31 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Getting started
04
• Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans
and sets the channel presets.
Tuning
32/68
Cancel
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are
broadcasting time signals, you can set
the clock manually.
Use the / buttons to set your
time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a
time relative to GMT.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic
time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock
manually.
k Setting
Clock Setting
Line System
•
er Save
Auto
P
Manual
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time
signals together with the programme.
This recorder can use these signals to
set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel
preset number that broadcasts a time
signal, then move the cursor down to
‘Start’ and press ENTER.
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
–– / –– / ––––
–– : –– AM
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
2
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
Singapore
Singapore
P
p Navigator
D.S.T
Off
Press then use the / buttons to
select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for daylight
saving/summer time, then press
ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using
daylight saving/summer time.
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
Singapore
Singapore
P
p Navigator
D.S.T
On
Set the date and time, then press
ENTER to make all the settings.
Taiwan and Philippines model: The date
is in month/day/year format.
Other: The date is in day/month/year
format.
Start
2/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
The recorder takes a short while to set
the time. After you see that it’s set, select
Next to proceed.
Line
System
Date
er Save
P
Time
p Navigator
Time Zone
1 / 01 / 2007 MON
12 : 00 AM
Singapore
Singapore
D.S.T
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
1 / 01 / 2007 MON
12 : 00 AM
2
S t ar t
N ext
If the time could not be set
automatically, press RETURN to go back
to the previous screen and select
Manual.
On
• Use the / buttons to change the
value in the highlighted field.
• Use the / buttons to move from one
field to another.
• Press ENTER to finish setting the time.
31
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 32 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
04
Getting started
ENTER
7
Select the TV screen type,
‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.
k Setting
TV Screen Size
Line System
er Save
Wide (16:9)
P
Standard (4:3)
p Navigator
ENTER
8
Select whether or not your TV
is compatible with progressive scan
video.
k Setting
Progressive
Line System
er Save
Compatible
P
Not Compatible
p Navigator Don't Know
• Note that progressive scan video is only
output through the component video
outputs and only when the video source
is NTSC (see Using other types of video
output on page 17).
ENTER
9
Press to continue after reading
the HDD caution.
k Setting
In the event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
Line
not System
be possible.
er Save
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD
P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
p Navigator
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
Press ENTER to continue.
ENTER
10
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit
the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you
want to start again.
k Setting
S et u p i s co m p l et e!
Line System
er Save
Fi n i sh S et u p
p Navigator
G o B ack
That completes basic setup using the Setup
Navigator.
32
En
• If there are blank channels with no
station, you can set these to skip using
the manual channel setting. See Manual
CH Setting on page 107.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 33 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
Chapter 5
Recording
About DVD recording
Max. titles
(per disc)
Max.
chapters
(per title)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99
99
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
VR mode
99
999*1
DVD+R/+RW
49
99*2
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVDRW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R
DL and DVD+R DL media.
Disc type/rec.
format
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized
for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each
has its advantages, and it depends on what
you want to do with the recording which
mode you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any
significant way, VR mode offers greater
possibilities for cutting, copying, and
changing the way the video is presented.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to
editing, but it has the advantage that it is
compatible with standard DVD players
(many of which won’t play VR mode discs1).
Once a disc is initialized for a particular
mode, all recording on that disc will be in
that mode.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR
mode recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR
mode recording.
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
Important
The table below shows the maximum
number of titles recordable per disc and the
maximum number of chapters per title:
*1
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
*2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
• This recorder cannot play or record
unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R discs recorded on another
recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on
another recorder are playable on this
recorder but are not recordable.
• The maximum continuous recording
time for one title is eight hours when
using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW
disc, the total number of recordable
titles remaining may not increase.
• Although this recorder can record PAL,
SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix
multiple TV line systems on one disc. A
disc can contain PAL and SECAM
recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See
also Additional information about the TV
system settings on page 117.
Note
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating
instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.
33
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 34 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
05
Recording
• If power to the recorder is cut (due to a
power outage, the plug being pulled from
the power outlet, etc.) during recording,
editing, initializing, finalizing or other
operation, some recorded material on the
disc, or the disc itself, may become
unusable. In this case, try re-initializing
the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a new
disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost
recordings, damaged discs or other
losses in these cases.
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on
a disc can affect playback and/or
recording performance. Please take
proper care of your discs.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for
recording failure due to power cuts,
defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
• See also Disc/content format playback
compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc
compatibility information.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
discs
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is
generally the same as recording to regular
single-layer discs; however, please note the
following points:
• When the recorder switches from the
first layer to the second during recording
a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new
title is automatically started on the new
layer.
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a
DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th
title is being recorded when the layer is
switched, recording will stop.
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a
DVD+R DL disc.
• You cannot play, record additional
material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded
on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
34
En
About HDD recording
Recording to the internal hard disk drive
(HDD) is very flexible; you have the full
choice of recording quality options,
including manual mode, and of course you
can record, erase and re-record as many
times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means
that you can store many hours of video on it,
even using the higher quality recording
modes.
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters
per title that can be recorded on the
HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more
recording is possible on the HDD after
the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
• The maximum continuous recording
time for one title is 12 hours.
• It is possible to record both PAL and
NTSC titles on the HDD. Before
recording, you need to make sure that
the Input Line System setting (page 117)
matches the TV line system of the source
you’re recording.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose
to record in one of two formats. Set the
format from the HDD Recording Format
item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 113).
Taiwan and Philippines model:
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed
copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When
recording a broadcast with a Secondary
Audio Programme (SAP) channel, set which
channel you want to record from the Initial
Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on
page 109).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 35 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW
isn’t possible. However, when SAP is
selected as the broadcast audio channel,
both the main and SAP channels are
recorded and you can switch the audio on
playback.
The table below shows the different audio
output possibilities:
Other:
SAP
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed
copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When
recording a bilingual broadcast, set which
channel you want to record from the Initial
Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on
page 109).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW
isn’t possible. However, both channels of
bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
Recorded audio
Audio output
Audio
setting
Left (L)
Right (R)
MONO
L+R
L+R
STEREO
L
R
L+R
SAP
Other:
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you
are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW,
DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD
Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual
Recording setting (page 109) to select the A/
L or B/R audio channel to record before
recording starts. In other cases, both
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be
recorded and you can switch on playback.
Restrictions on video
recording
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is
recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format
(only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby
Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When
set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high
quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.
You cannot record copy-protected video
using this recorder. Copy-protected video
includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite
broadcasts. If copy-protected material is
encountered during a recording, recording
will pause automatically and an error
message will be displayed on-screen.
Taiwan and Philippines model:
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be
recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRMcompatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see
below).
If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel
and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/
-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the AUDIO
button to select the Mono, Stereo or SAP
audio channel to record before recording
starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then
both the main and SAP audio channels will
be recorded and you can switch on playback.
When recording a TV broadcast or through
an external input, you can display copy
control information on screen (see
Displaying disc information on-screen on
page 62).
35
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 36 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
05
Recording
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling
system developed for the recording of ‘copy
once’ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands
for Content Protection for Recordable Media.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which
means that you can record copy-once
broadcast programmes, but you cannot then
make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRMcompatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or
DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted
in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played
on players that are specifically compatible
with CPRM.
Recording equipment and
copyright
Recording equipment should be used only
for lawful copying and you are advised to
check carefully what is lawful copying in the
country in which you are making a copy.
Copying of copyright material such as films
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a
legal exception or consented to by the
rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Using the built-in TV tuner
There are three different ways to select TV
channels. Note that you can’t change the TV
channel during playback, recording or
during recording standby.
CH
CH +/– buttons
•
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
•
WXYZ
CLEAR
CLEAR
Number buttons
For example, to select channel 4, press 4
then ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4,
ENTER.1
• CH +/– buttons on the front panel
Changing audio channels
Taiwan and Philippines model:
Some TV programmes are broadcast with
both a main and a Secondary Audio
Programme (SAP). You can change the TV
audio using the AUDIO button.
AUDIO
•
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed onscreen.
Mono
SAP
Stereo
• If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP
channel being broadcast, you will still
hear the main audio channel.
• If the sound is poor quality when set to
Stereo, you can often improve it by
changing to Mono.
36
En
Note
1 • Taiwan and Philippines model: Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered
1 through 125.
• Other: Channel presets are numbered 1 through 99.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 37 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
Note
Note
• When recording to the HDD with HDD
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM
setting, only one channel of a dual mono
broadcast is recorded. In this case,
decide which language you want to
record before recording by setting the
Dual Mono Recording setting (see Dual
Mono Recording on page 109).
Other:
You can change the audio channel of the
broadcast or external input signal.
AUDIO
•
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed onscreen.
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM
Select on page 108) is set to NICAM and
you are watching a NICAM broadcast,
you can switch between NICAM and
Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
NICAM
Regular
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you
can also select the language.
NICAM A
Regular
NICAM B
NICAM A+B
• You can also select the language for a
non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.
A (L)
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
• When watching a recording made from
an external input with Bilingual
recording selected (see External Audio
on page 108), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both
(L+R).
L
R
L+R
• When recording to the HDD with HDD
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM
setting, only one channel of a bilingual
broadcast is recorded. In this case,
decide which language you want to
record before recording by setting the
Bilingual Recording setting (see
Bilingual Recording on page 109).
Setting the picture quality/
recording time
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Before starting a recording, you will usually
want to set the picture quality/recording
time. There are six standard settings
available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and
recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see
Manual Recording on page 112), a further
option will be available (MN1 to MN32,
LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD
recording mode that features a transfer rate
of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you
set).
When recording to DVD, MN32 is the
highest recording quality available. If you
select XP+, the recording mode will
automatically revert to MN32.
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the
longest recording time available. If you
select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording
mode will automatically revert to SLP.
REC MODE
•
Press repeatedly to select the
recording quality.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about
one hour of recording time on a DVD
disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality,
used for most applications, gives about
two hours of recording time on a DVD.
37
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 38 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
05
Recording
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than
SP, but doubles the recording time on a
DVD to about four hours.
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than
LP, but gives about six hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality
than EP, but gives about eight hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest
video quality but gives about ten hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• MN1 to MN32/LPCM1/XP+2 – Manual/
Linear PCM/XP+ (available only when
manual recording is on).
The setting is indicated in the front panel
display, and shown on-screen together with
the recording time for a blank recordable
disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for
that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On
Screen Display setting (see On Screen
Display on page 115) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
Basic recording from the TV
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R
or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must
initialize it before proceeding (see
Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 50).
CH
2
Select a TV channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel
number:
ch
Channel number
• While the recorder is stopped, you can
also use the number buttons on the
remote to select the channel (e.g., for
channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also
use the CH +/– buttons on the front
panel to select the channel number.
REC MODE
3
Set the picture quality/recording
time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed instructions.
AUDIO
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Basic recording from the TV involves just
setting the channel to record, choosing
whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and
selecting the recording quality.
1
Select the HDD or
DVD for recording.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a
recordable disc (if you load a new blank
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
HDD
38
En
DVD
4
Select the audio channel to
record.
See Changing audio channels on page 36 for
more on this.
Taiwan and Philippines model:
• When recording in VR mode (DVD) or
with HDD Recording Format set to Video
Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SAP
audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on
playback. The only exception to this is
when the picture quality is set to LPCM,
in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
Note
1 • Taiwan and Philippines model: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality.
When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select which audio channel to record (see Dual Mono
Recording on page 109).
• Other: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a
bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 109).
2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied
to DVD, XP+ recordings are always copied in real time.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 39 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
Other:
• When recording in VR mode, if a
broadcast is bilingual, both audio
channels are recorded, allowing you to
switch the audio channel on playback.
The only exception to this is when the
picture quality is set to LPCM, in which
case you do need to select the audio
channel before recording.
REC
Start recording.
5
If you want to set a recording end time, press
the REC button repeatedly. The recording
time increases in 30 minute increments, up
to a maximum of six hours. The time the
recording will end is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display. When the recording
ends, the recorder automatically switches
into standby if no other operation is being
performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press
REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any
time1, press PAUSE. Press again to
restart the recording (If recording to the
HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new
chapter is started after recording
restarts).
STOP REC
6
Press to stop recording.
• If you set the recording time in the
previous step, you can still stop the
recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when
there is no more space on the HDD/
DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording
(whichever is sooner).
05
Setting a timer recording
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Using the timer recording features you can
program up to 32 timer recordings up to a
month in advance. Timer recording
programmes can be set to record just once,
every day, or every week.
There are three ways to set a timer recording;
using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see
Easy Timer Recording on page 40), using the
G-Code programming system (see Timer
recording using the G-Code™ programming
system on page 41), or using manual timer
recording (see Setting a manual timer
recording on page 43).
You can set the recording quality for your
timer recording in the same way as for a
regular recording, but with the added option
of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on
the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a
blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).
You can set timer recordings to record to a
recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For
regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer
recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature
to automatically replace the previous timer
recording with the new one. Note that when
you use this feature, the previous recording
made on that timer programme will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of
whether you have watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the
recording on to the disc if it would not
otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 112 for more on
this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record
to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD
loaded at the time of the recording, the
Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the programme to the
HDD for you.
Note
1 Except during Chase Play.
39
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 40 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
05
Recording
Important
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are
already 32 timer programmes waiting to
be recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or
unfinalized.
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
• When the front panel display is set to ON,
the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front
panel display when the timer is active. If
the indicator is blinking it means that (for
a DVD timer recording) there is no disc
loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it
means that the HDD is not recordable).
• Approximately two minutes before a
timer recording is set to start, the
recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you
cannot use some functions.
• The maximum length for timer
recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.
However, because one title (HDD) is
limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note
that there will be a break in the recording
of a few seconds between titles.
• When a scheduled recording finishes,
this unit’s power is not turned off if the
power for the plasma television is on. If
you want this unit’s power to turn off
after a timer recording finishes, set the
HDMI Control to Off (page 115).
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Timer Recording’, then
‘Easy Timer’ from the Home Menu.
PREV
Set the TV channel to
Easy Timer Recording
AM
8:00
PM
9:00
40
En
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan
and Philippines model.
11:00
12:00
1:00
2:00
1/03
1/01
9:30
MON
7ch
REC MODE
AM
– ––:––
HDD/DVD
SP
HDD
REC MODE
3
Set the recording quality.
• DVD recording: The AUTO option
automatically sets the best recording
quality for the space available on the
disc loaded at the time of recording.
• HDD recording: The AUTO option
automatically sets the best recording
quality that would fit on to a blank DVD
disc.
HDD
DVD
4
Select the HDD or
DVD for recording.
5
Move the cursor to the
recording start date and time on the grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back
an hour at a time using the REV
SCAN and FWD SCAN buttons.
Current time
Recording start time
Easy Timer Recording
AM
8:00
PM
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
1:00
2:00
1/01
1/02
1/03
1/01
Important
10:00
1/01
1/02
Easy Timer Recording
As the name suggests, Easy Timer
Recording makes setting up a timer
recording as simple as possible.
NEXT
2
record.
7ch
MON
11:45 AM – ––:––
REC MODE
SP
HDD/DVD
HDD
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 41 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set
the timer recording for up to a month in
advance). Each column is a 15 minute
interval.
The darker area represents time that has
already passed and can’t therefore be
selected. The lighter area is time that’s
available.
ENTER
6
Set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the
middle of the screen.
• You can go back and reset the start time
if you need to by pressing RETURN.
7
Move the cursor to the
recording end time on the grid.
Recording start time
Recording end time
Easy Timer Recording
AM
11:00
PM
12:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
5:00
Timer recording using the G-Code™
programming system
This system makes programming timer
recordings very simple. Most TV guides
publish G-Code programming numbers with
their programme details. If you want to make
a timer recording of a programme, you just
input the corresponding code. The date,
start, stop and channel settings are made
automatically. All you have to do is tell the
recorder the recording mode, and whether
it’s a once-only recording or a regular
recording.
Note that if the country setting is incorrect
(set in the Setup Navigator), timer
recordings made using the G-Code
programming system may not work as
expected.
1 Press ‘G-Code’ to display the G-Code
programme screen.
You can also access this screen from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select
Timer Recording, then G-Code system).
1/01
1/02
1/03
1/01
7ch
MON
11:45 AM –
REC MODE
SP
1:45
HDD/DVD
PM
HDD
As you move the cursor around the grid, an
arrow stretches from the start time to the
current cursor position, representing the
length of the recording. A recording of up to
six hours can be set.
8
ENTER
G-Code#
Set the end time.
9
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer
recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to
the Easy Timer Recording screen.
• You can check the timer recording
details you just set from the main timer
recording screen (see Setting a manual
timer recording on page 43).
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cancel
7
8
9
Details
0
Clear
Enter
• Use the number buttons to enter the
G-Code programming number. (To clear
the last digit entered, press CLEAR.)
• You can also use the ///
buttons to select digits from the onscreen display.
2 After making the settings, select
‘Enter’ and press ENTER.
The timer recording screen appears with the
timer programme you just set.
41
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 42 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
3 Confirm that the settings are correct.
If the channel number isn’t displayed, use
the / buttons to highlight CH, then use
the / buttons to set the correct channel
number.
• If the channel number is set, but
incorrectly, set up the guide channel
(see G-Code CH Setting on page 107).
4
Select ‘Store Programme’ to finish.
• Other options in the same menu panel
allow you to name the programme, and
change the recording destination and/or
recording mode.
Checking/editing timer recording
settings
You can check and/or edit the timer
recording settings made by the G-Code
system by selecting Details from the
G-Code# setting screen.
G-Code programming with the
power off
You can enter a G-Code programming
number when the recorder is in standby.
Note that the recording is always made to
the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc,
you’ll need to switch on the power and use
the full G-Code programme screen.
Important
• You can’t use this feature until you have
set up the guide channels. see G-Code
CH Setting on page 107.
• You can’t change the recording mode.
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer
recordings.
1 Press ‘G-Code’.
The front panel display shows the current
recording mode and prompts you to enter
the G-Code programming number.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Details’ from the
G-Code# setting screen.
The Timer Programme Set screen appears,
filled out with the timer recording details.
2 Check and edit the fields as
necessary.
See Setting a manual timer recording on
page 43 for more on this.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Store Programme’ to
save the timer programme and exit.
2 Use the number buttons to enter the
number.
• To clear the last digit entered, press
CLEAR.
3 Press ENTER.
The display shows the timer settings:
Date Start time End time HDD and
Recording channel Recording mode
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display,
check that the number is correct and
that the guide channel is set (see G-Code
CH Setting on page 107), then set the
timer recording again.
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it
means that although you entered a valid
number, the programme has already
finished.
42
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 43 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
Setting a manual timer recording
The timer recording screen you can see all
the timer programmes already set, clear
programmes and set up new ones.
1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer
Recording screen.
You can also access the Timer Recording
screen from the Home Menu (press HOME
MENU, select Timer Recording, then Timer
Recording).
2 Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer
programme, then press ENTER.
Timer Programme Set
Manhattan Open Tennis
CH
Date
10ch
EVERYDAY
Start
Stop
6:00PM
Detailed Settings
Record To
Recording Mode
Auto Replace Rec.
Genre
Dual Mono Recording
HDD Recording Format
7:00PM
Enter Details
HDD
XP
On
No Category
L
Video Mode On
Extend
30 min
Store Programme
Set Detailed
Set Title Name
Cancel
This screen shows all the timer programmes
currently set.
Timer Programme View
3/26 SUN 3:00PM
Tmr Pgms 3/32
Manhattan Open Tennis
3/26 SUN 6:00PM – 7:00PM
World Journey
3/27 MON 7:30PM – 9:00PM
Flower
MON – FRI 1:30PM – 2:00PM
OK
10ch
OK
4ch
Until 4/20
8ch
New Input
HDD Remain
DVD Remain
59h59m(SP)
1h59m(SP)
• Each row is for one timer recording
programme, with the date and time
information, channel, recording mode,
DVD or HDD and recording status.
• The amount of free space available on
the HDD and the currently loaded
recordable DVD is shown towards the
bottom of the screen.
• In the upper-right corner, the number of
timer programmes already set is shown
next to Tmr Pgms.
• If there are more than five timer
programmes already set, press
NEXT to switch page (go back using
the PREV button).
• You can also delete a timer programme
before it’s started (before the recorder
enters timer recording standby) by
highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See
also Deleting a timer programme on
page 45.
3 Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the / buttons to select a field; use
the / buttons to change the value.
• CH – Choose a channel (2 to 69 for
antenna channels; 1 to 125 for cable/Pr1
to Pr 99, excluding skip channels), or one
of the external inputs from which to
record.
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in
advance, or select a daily or weekly
programme.
• Start – Set the recording start time.
• Stop – Set the recording end time
(maximum length of a timer recording is
24 hours).
• Extend – Extend the end time of the
timer recording (select Off, 30, 60, 90 or
120 mins).
4 If you want to change the recording
mode, recording destination, etc., select
‘Set Detailed’.
In this area you can set:
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk
recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select
HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or
weekly timer recording only).
Recording Mode – Select XP, SP, LP, EP,
SLP or SEP, (See Setting the picture quality/
recording time on page 37). If Manual
Recording is on, then you can also select the
LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER
then use the / buttons to select the
level).
43
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 44 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
05
Recording
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases
the previous daily or weekly recording when
the next one is recorded.
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD
recording only).
Dual Mono/Bilingual Recording – Select
which channel of a dual mono/bilingual
broadcast to record (necessary if recording
to a Video mode DVD or to the HDD with the
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode
On).
HDD Recording Format – Select Video
Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on
whether you need high-speed copying to
Video mode DVD capability or not.
5 After entering all the timer recording
information, highlight ‘Store
Programme’ and press ENTER.
The timer recording list screen is displayed
again. The timer programme you just input
appears in the list. The rightmost column
shows various timer recording status
messages:
• OK – Can be recorded.
• Time Over – Not enough space on the
HDD (the recording won’t finish).
• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12
hours set (when recording to the HDD
the recording will be split into two titles).
• Overlap – Two timer programmes
partially or completely overlap. The one
starting earlier will take priority.
• Until ... (eg., Until 8/13) – For a regular
recording, the last programme that
could be recorded is shown.
• Data Over –Can’t record because the
disc management area of the disc is full.
• Cancel Once – A regular timer
programme is set to skip.
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.
• Title Over – Can’t record because there
is already the maximum number of titles
on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99).
• Recording – The programme is currently
recording.
44
En
• Standby – The recorder is in timer
recording standby.
• nothing displayed – Another timer
recording or copying is in progress.
6 To exit the timer recording screen,
press HOME MENU.
Tip
• To enter a title name for the timer
recording in advance, select Set Title
Name and follow the on-screen display.
Note
• If you set a DVD timer recording but
there is no recordable DVD disc loaded,
or the disc loaded doesn’t have enough
free space for the complete recording,
Recovery is shown. In this case (unless
you load a suitable disc before the
recording actually starts), the recorder
will use the HDD for recording. (The
message Can’t Rec will appear if there
are already 999 titles on the HDD or if
there is not enough free space on the
HDD for recording.)
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized
Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 112) is
set to On, the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the
recording on the disc. If the recording
will not fit onto the disc even on MN1
(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) recording
quality then the Recovery Recording
feature will automatically make the
recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the
HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may
not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or
high-speed copying when an Auto
Replace Recording is due to start, the
new timer recording will not replace the
old one. However, the next time the timer
recording starts, both of the older two
programmes will be erased.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 45 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
Editing a timer programme
You can change any of the settings in a timer
programme before the recording is due to
start.
1
3 Press then select ‘Cancel Once’
from the command menu panel.
• In the timer programme list, Cancel
Once appears by the programme.
• You can also just press PAUSE when
the timer programme is highlighted.
Press TIMER REC.
2 Highlight the timer programme you
want to change..
3 Press then select ‘Modify’ from the
command menu panel.
Alternatively, press ENTER.
The Timer Programme Set screen appears
from which you can edit the settings.
4 Edit the timer recording settings as
necessary.
5 Select ‘Store Programme’ to finish.
Confirm the settings you made from the
following screen.
Deleting a timer programme
You can delete timer programmes you no
longer need.
1
05
Press TIMER REC.
2 Highlight the timer programme you
want to erase..
3 Press then select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.
Extending a timer recording in
progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time in two different ways.
This can be useful if a broadcast programme
overruns, for example.
Cancelling or extending the timer
REC
Press and hold for three seconds
1
during a timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator
disappears from the front panel display
indicating that the timer has been cancelled.
REC
Press repeatedly to extend
2
recording in 30 minute blocks.
Programming a new end time
You can edit the end time of a timer
recording you have previously set.
1
Press TIMER REC.
• You can also just press CLEAR when the
timer programme is highlighted.
Skipping a regular timer
programme
2
Highlight the timer recording
you want to change.
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer
programme, you can set the recorder to skip
the next scheduled recording.
3
Press then select ‘Modify’
from the command menu panel.
Alternatively, press ENTER.
1
The Timer Programme Set screen appears,
from which you can edit the settings.
Press TIMER REC.
2 Highlight the timer programme you
want to skip..
ENTER
ENTER
4
Edit the end time as necessary.
You can also edit the Extend time parameter.
45
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 46 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
Timer recording FAQ
ENTER
5
Select ‘Store Programme’.
HOME
MENU
6
Press to exit the Timer Recording
screen.
Stopping a timer recording
Frequently Asked Questions
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder
doesn’t start recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is
recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on
page 100), and that there are fewer than
99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
STOP REC
1
Press during a timer recording.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
Preventing use of the recorder
before a timer recording (child
lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote
control buttons inoperative using the child
lock feature. This is useful when you set a
timer recording and want to make sure that
the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
STANDBY/ON
If the recorder is on, switch it
1
into standby.
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for
three seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows
LOCKED. If any buttons are pressed on the
remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly
displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold
(Stop) on the front panel (while the
recorder is stopped) for three seconds
until the display shows UNLOCKED.
• Even if you make Child Lock settings,
this unit can still be controlled by the
remote of a connected plasma
television. If you do not want this unit to
be able to be controlled by another
component when you have set a Child
Lock, turn this unit’s HDMI Control to
OFF (page 115).
46
En
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer
programme! Why not?
You can’t enter a timer programme if the
clock isn’t set.
• What happens when two or more timer
programmes overlap?
Basically, the programme with the earlier
recording start time has priority.
However, the recorder will start recording
the programme with the later start time
after the earlier programme is finished. If
schedule to record two programmes
have the same times (but different
channels, for example), then only one of
the two programmes will be recorded. In
this event you should cancel the
scheduled recording of the lesser
important programme. If one of the
overlapping programmes is a regular
timer programme, you may choose
‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it
overlap with a separately scheduled
programme (see Skipping a regular timer
programme on page 45).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 47 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
Simultaneous recording and
playback (Chase Play)
HDD
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording
that is still in progress from the start, without
having to wait until the recording has finished
(i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching
the recording in progress. You can watch
anything else already on the HDD (or on a
DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen
(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD on page 56).
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the
recording input (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S
only).
Important
• You can’t use this feature during Auto
Start Recording, or in Auto Start
Recording standby (the AUTO indicator
is lit in the front panel display).
PLAY
•
Press during recording to
start playback from the beginning of the
current recording1.
DISC NAVIGATOR
•
Press during recording to
select another title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls,
such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and
skip.
• To stop playback, press STOP
(recording will continue).
• To stop recording, press STOP REC
(playback will continue).
05
• During recording or in timer recording
standby, you can’t play an HDD title,
DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the
Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title
(see also Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 117).
Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the
playback track/title changes then
playback will automatically stop.
Recording from an external
component
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can record from an external component,
such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to
one of the recorder’s external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you
want to record from is connected
properly to the HDD/DVD recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for
connection options.
INPUT
2 SELECT Press repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
There are three analog inputs. The current
input is shown on-screen and in the front
panel display:
• L1 – INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
• L2 – INPUT 2 (front panel)
• L3 – INPUT 3
Check that the Audio In settings for
External Audio, and Dual Mono
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you
want them (see Audio In on page 108).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed
or stretched), adjust on the source
component or your TV before recording.
Note
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work
while copying or backing up.
47
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 48 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not
start if another timer recording is in
progress.
• To watch video coming in via the DV
input (front panel), select DV > DV
Video Playback from the Home Menu
(see also Playing from a DV camcorder on
page 64).
• Timer recordings take precedence over
Auto Start Recording. Auto Start
Recording will stop if a timer recording is
due to start. After the timer recording
has finished, Auto Start Recording will
resume.
REC MODE
3
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed information.
• Turn the HDMI Control setting to Off
when using Auto Start Recording
(page 115).
HDD
DVD
4
Select the HDD or
DVD for recording.
REC
5
Press to start recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using
Copy Guard, you will not be able to
record it. See Restrictions on video
recording on page 35 for more details.
Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner
HDD
If you have a satellite tuner or some other
kind of set top box connected to the INPUT
1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the
recorder start and stop recording
automatically with the timer settings of the
connected component. (If the other
component doesn’t have a built-in timer,
you’ll need to use it with an external timer
unit.)1
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this
recorder starts recording when it detects a
signal from the other component. When the
signal ceases, the recorder stops recording.
Important
• It takes a little while for this recorder to
switch on and start recording after
detecting a signal. Please bear this in
mind when setting the timer.
48
En
1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver
(or other component), then switch it into
standby (if necessary).
Check the manual that came with the
receiver if you’re not sure how to do this.
2 Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for
‘External Audio’ and ‘Dual Mono
Recording/Bilingual Recording’ are as
you want them.
See Audio In on page 108 for more on these
settings.
3
Set up the recorder.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording
quality. See Setting the picture quality/
recording time on page 37 for detailed
information.
4 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer
Recording’, then ‘Auto Start Recording’.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start
Recording on, or ‘No’ to switch off.
If you choose ‘Yes’ the recorder
automatically goes into standby.
The AUTO indicator in the front panel
display lights.
The recorder will automatically switch on
and start recording when the other
component comes on. Recording stops
when the external component switches off.
Note
1 You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:
– the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby.
– the HDD is not recordable.
– the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 49 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press
STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in
standby. The AUTO indicator goes off.
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once
recording has already started, press
REC for three seconds (this cancels
Auto Start Recording, but recording
continues), then STOP REC to stop
recording.
• You can also stop recording by pressing
STOP REC then selecting Yes to
confirm.
Tip
• Alternatively, with no OSD displayed,
press and hold the front panel
STOP REC button for more than three
seconds to switch Auto Start Recording
on directly. After switching on, switch
the recorder into standby.
When using the Video Control function of an
external component, set the HDMI Control
to Off (page 115).
Playing your recordings on
other DVD players
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Most regular DVD players can play finalized
discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R discs. A number of players
(including many Pioneer models) can also
play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode,
finalized or not. Most players will not play VR
mode DVD-R discs, although some DVDROM drives and DVD recorders may be able
to (finalization might be necessary). Check
the manual that came with the player to
check what kinds of discs it will play.
05
When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles
when you play the disc. There are a number
of different styles of title menu to choose
from to suit the content of the disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual
way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to
display the menu, then using the ///
followed by ENTER to select titles and
start playback.
Finalizing a disc
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc
so that it can be played on a regular DVD
player or computer equipped with a suitable
DVD-ROM drive.1
Note that the disc name will appear in the
title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure
the disc name is as you want it before you
finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc,
see Input Disc Name on page 100 before
starting the steps below.
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need
finalizing. However, if you want a title menu
to appear when you play the disc, then you
will need to finalize. When using a
DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even
after finalizing. although the title menu will
disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc
again to generate a new title menu.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R disc, you can’t
edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW
disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize
on page 101 for how to do this.
Note
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize
the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117 for how to change the recorder’s
setting.
49
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 50 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
05
Recording
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding
DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and
edited on this recorder even after
finalizing.
• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and
DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in
order to play in other recorders/players.
Note however that some recorders/
players will not play even finalized duallayer discs.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped
before proceeding.
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >
‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Finalize
Next Screen
Initialize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Start
Optimize HDD
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the
Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not
support this feature. These discs will
have only a text title menu when finalized
on this recorder.
5 The recorder will now start finalizing
the disc.
During finalization:
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW
or DVD+R/+RW disc is going to take
more than around four minutes, you can
press ENTER to cancel. Around four
minutes before completion, the option to
cancel disappears.
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR
mode DVD-R disc.
• How long finalization takes depends on
the type of disc, how much is recorded
on the disc and the number of titles on
the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can
take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW
discs can take up to 20 minutes.
Initializing recordable DVD
discs
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
ENTER
4
For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title
menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to start
finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that
appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a
DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD player.
Finalize
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either
Video mode recording or VR mode
recording.1
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or
DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for
recording automatically. By default, blank
DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on
page 51 if you want to change the default to
Video mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recordings out of the box; if you want to use
a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must
initialize it before recording anything on the
disc.
50
En
Note
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize
it for Video mode recording.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 51 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Recording
05
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be
initialized in order to erase the contents of
the disc.
Important
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or
DVD-RAM disc will erase everything
recorded on it. Make sure there is
nothing on the disc that you want to
keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a
DVD-RW disc in a different format if it
was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording,
you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to
Video mode.
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
DVD-RW
• Default setting: VR Mode
Initialization mode is automatically carried
out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You
must set the desired initialization mode
before inserting a disc.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto
Init.’, then ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
VR Mode
Initialize
Lock Disc
Video Mode
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
ENTER
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video
Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.
Disc Setup
Basic
VR Mode
Start
Initialize
Video Mode
Start
Finalize
Initialize DVD+RW
Start
Optimize HDD
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the
disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take
up to an hour).
Initializing Disc
2ch
1 min left
51
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 52 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
06
Playback
Chapter 6
Playback
Introduction
Most of the features described in this
chapter make use of on-screen displays.
Navigate these using the cursor buttons and
ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN button.
Remember also that the button guide at the
bottom of every screen shows which buttons
do what.
Many of the functions covered in this
chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video
CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs
and CDs, although the exact operation of
some varies slightly with the kind of disc
loaded.
• Many functions are not available when a
Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start
playback from the Disc Navigator screen
for non-PBC playback (see Using the
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs
on page 57).
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files,
see The PhotoViewer on page 92.
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and
DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain
playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a
malfunction.
HDD
DVD
1
Select the HDD or
DVD for playback.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3
below.
Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
Load a disc.
2
Load a disc with the label side facing up,
using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if
you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video
disc, load it with the side you want to play
face down).
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD,
please first read the note on page 54.
PLAY
3
Important
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan
and Philippines model.
Basic playback
ALL
This section shows you how to use your
recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD,
etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD.
Start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video
CD, a disc menu may appear when you
start playback. Use the ///
buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to
navigate DVD disc menus, and the
number buttons and ENTER for Video
CD menus.
• When playing video from the HDD,
playback will automatically stop after the
end of a title is reached.
• There may be a slight pause when
playback switches from the first to the
second layer of a dual-layer disc.
• See the following sections for more
details on playing specific kinds of discs.
STOP
Important
52
En
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’
means any kind of playable or recordable
DVD. If a function is specific to a
particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.
4
Press to stop playback.
5 When you’ve finished using the
recorder, eject the disc and switch the
recorder back into standby.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 53 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD
discs.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from
the place last stopped.
PLAY
06
STEP/SLOW
DISC NAVIGATOR
MENU
TOP MENU
STOP
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV
NEXT
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CLEAR
CLEAR
ENTER
BACK
CM
SKIP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing
PLAY. (Press STOP again
to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to skip to previous/next
chapter/title. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:
PREV may not always skip
to the previous title.
Except VR mode: During
playback, enter a chapter
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that chapter
within the currently playing
title.
On some discs, you can also
use the number buttons to
select numbered items in the
disc menu.
VR mode only: During playback,
enter a title number then press
ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a
number entry and start again.
(Commercial back/skip) Each
press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum
of two hours in either direction.
Press to display the menu of a
DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW
discs finalized on this recorder
will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc
menu.)
Use the cursor buttons to
navigate DVD-Video disc
menus; press ENTER to select
items.
ENTER
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
Press to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance
a single frame in either
direction.
RETURN
Press to return to the previous
level of a DVD-Video disc menu.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback
controls when playing video recorded on the
hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from
the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops
after the end of a title is
reached.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing
PLAY. (Press STOP again
to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
53
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 54 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
06
Playback
PREV
NEXT
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CLEAR
CLEAR
Press to skip to previous/next
chapter/title. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a title
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV
NEXT
ENTER
CM
BACK
SKIP
STEP/SLOW
(Commercial back/skip) Each
press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum
of two hours in either direction.
Press to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance
a single frame in either
direction.
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3
files.
Press to start playback.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CLEAR
CLEAR
54
During playback, enter a track
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC
for short) menus. These discs show PBC in
the display when you load them and display
a menu on-screen from where you can select
what to watch.2
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is
displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last
stopped.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
En
Press to skip to previous/next
track (or folder for WMA/MP3
disc). (During playback you can
also use the front panel CH +/–
buttons.)
ENTER
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Except WMA: Press to start
scanning. Press again to
increase the scanning speed.
(There are two scan speeds; the
current scan speed is shown
on-screen.)
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only: You can resume
playback from the same point
by pressing PLAY. (Press
STOP again to cancel the
resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with
a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected
using the
AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 61).
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not
available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc
Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 57).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 55 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV
NEXT
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
06
Playing DivX video files
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for DivX video files.
Press to skip to previous/next
track.
When a PBC menu is
displayed, press to display the
previous/next page. (During
playback you can also use the
front panel CH +/– buttons.)
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from
the place last stopped.
Playback of titles (DivX files)
proceeds in alphabetical order.
PLAY
STOP
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
CLEAR
CLEAR
ENTER
During playback, enter a track
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
While a PBC menu screen is
displayed, use to select
numbered menu items.
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
BACK
CM
SKIP
STEP/SLOW
RETURN
(Commercial back/skip) Each
press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum
of two hours in either direction.
Note that this function doesn’t
work when playing in PBC
mode.
Press to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed
(forward only).
While paused, press to advance
a single frame (forward only).
Press to display the disc menu
of a Video CD/Super VCD
playing in PBC mode.
PREV
NEXT
STEP/SLOW
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing
PLAY. (Press STOP again
to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next
title. (During playback you can
also use the front panel CH +/–
buttons.)
Press to start slow motion
playback (press repeatedly to
change the slow motion play
speed).
While paused, press to advance
one frame.
Press to display the playback
audio type; press repeatedly to
change the playback audio
type.
Press to display subtitle
information; press repeatedly to
change subtitles.
55
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 56 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
Using the Disc Navigator to
browse the contents of a disc
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with
recordable discs and the HDD
Changing the display style of the
Disc Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc
Navigator in various different ways, sorted
alphabetically, by recording date, by genre,
and so on. You can also choose whether to
display four or eight titles on the screen at
the same time.
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse
and edit video on recordable DVDs and the
HDD, and to view information on titles.
See also Editing on page 67 for more on
editing recordable discs.
1
panel.
Display the View Options
The View Options panel
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Style
1
DVD.
HDD
DVD
Select the HDD or
2
Genre
Open the Disc Navigator.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
9
Recent first
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Browse the list of titles.
• Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to
display the previous/next page of titles.
• To change the thumbnail picture
displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on
page 72.
• For HDD recordings, you should be able
to see a thumbnail title digest. If it
doesn’t display, set Set Preview to
Normal. See Set Preview on page 116.
Play the highlighted title.
• You can also select Play from the
command menu options.
ENTER
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
MENU
• You can also access the Disc Navigator
from the Home Menu.
56
3
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7: 00PM4ch SP
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
En
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
4
2
Recent first
NEW first
DISC NAVIGATOR
3
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
4 Titles
4 Titles
Sort order
10Titles
11
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or
‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per
screen view
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent
first), unwatched first, title name or
recording date (oldest first)
• Genre – Display all genres or just a
selected genre
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then
press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to
the new display preferences.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 57 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
Using the Disc Navigator with
playback-only discs
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX
Scanning discs
A L L (except WMA)
You can scan discs at various speeds,
forwards or backwards.1
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD
or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC
NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to
the Disc Navigator screen.
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
Depending on the type of disc you have
loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly
different, but they are all navigated in the
same way.
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX
disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title
within a folder that you want to play.
Disc Navigator
CD
WMA/MP3
Divx
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
03.Dance
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks
and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you
can switch the playback area between
CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. This can only
be done while the disc is stopped.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
1
During playback, start
reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
2
Press repeatedly to change
the scanning speed.
There are four scanning speeds available
when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX
title. Reverse playback is also possible with
HDD and DVD video.2
There are two scanning speeds for other
types of disc.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
Playing in slow motion
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
You can play video at various slow motion
speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be
played in slow motion in either direction,
while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles
can only be played forwards in slow motion.
There is no sound when playing in slow motion.
STEP/SLOW
1 Press to start slow motion
reverse or forward play.
STEP/SLOW
2 Press repeatedly to change
the slow motion speed.
The current playback speed is indicated onscreen.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
Note
1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD
disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
57
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 58 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
Frame advance/frame
reverse
Search Mode
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
The Search Mode feature lets you start
playback from a specified point in a disc by
time2 or by title/chapter/folder/track
number.
You can advance or back up video on a DVD
disc1 or the HDD frame-by-frame.
ALL
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles,
you can only use frame advance.
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
STEP/SLOW
2 Back up or advance one
frame with each press.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the
Play Mode menu, then choose a search
option.
The available search options depend on the
type of disc.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/
track number or a search time.
CLEAR
CLEAR
The Play Mode menu
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
ALL
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
The Play Mode menu gives you access to
search functions, repeat and programme
play functions.
• Press
menu.
PLAY MODE
to display the Play Mode
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25
minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0.
For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds
into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2
minutes and 30 seconds into the current
track, press 2, 3, 0.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For
example, for track 6, press 6.
• You can also access the Play Mode
menu from the Home Menu (press
HOME MENU).
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press
HOME MENU or PLAY MODE.
58
En
3
ENTER
Start playback.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 59 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
A-B Repeat
DVD HDD
CD
Repeat play
Video CD DivX
The A-B Repeat function allows you to
specify two points (A and B) within a track or
title that form a loop which is played over
and over.1
ENTER
1
During playback, select ‘A-B
Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
ALL
There are various repeat play options,
depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if
you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also
possible to use repeat play together with
programme play to repeat the tracks/
chapters in the programme list (see
Programme play below).2
ENTER
ENTER
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’
highlighted, press at the point you want
the loop to start.
Play Mode
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
•
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play
Mode menu, then choose a repeat play
mode.
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
ENTER
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted,
press at the point you want the loop to
end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the
start point and plays the loop round and
round.
• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the
loop must be in the same title.
• To resume normal playback, select Off
from the A-B Repeat menu, or press
CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play
Mode menu) is displayed.
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
• To resume normal playback, select
Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu,
or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as
the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Programme play
HDD DVD-Video
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
This feature lets you program the play order
of titles/chapters3/folders/tracks on a disc or
the HDD.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Programme’ from the
Play Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit
Programme’.
Note
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.
3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be
sometimes be played, depending on the disc.
59
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 60 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
06
Playback
The Input/Edit Programme screen varies
according to the disc type. Below is the DVD
input screen.
Programme
Title
Title
Title
Title
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
(01-03)
01
02
03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
ENTER
2
Select a title, chapter, folder
or track for the current step in the
programme list.
After pressing ENTER to add the title/
chapter/folder/track, the step number
automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the programme list,
highlight the step number where you
want to insert another step, then select a
chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent
steps move down one.
• To delete a step from the programme list,
highlight the step you want to delete,
then press CLEAR.
3 Repeat step 2 to build up a
programme list.
A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/
chapters/folders/tracks.
PLAY
4
Play the programme list.
Programme play remains active until you
cancel programme play, erase the
programme list, eject the disc or switch off
the recorder.
Tip
• To save your programme list and exit the
programme edit screen without starting
playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY
MODE.
60
En
• During programme play, press NEXT
to skip to the next programme step.
• To repeat play the programme list, select
Programme Repeat from the Repeat
Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on
page 59).
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch
off programme play (if no menu OSD,
such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase
the programme list.
• From the Programme menu you can
also:
Start Programme Play – Starts
playback of a saved programme list
Cancel Programme Play – Turns off
programme play, but does not erase the
programme list
Erase Programme List – Erases the
programme list and turns off
programme play
Displaying and switching
subtitles
DVD-Video DivX
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in
one or more languages; the disc box will
usually tell you which subtitle languages are
available. You can switch subtitle language
during playback.1
Check the disc packaging for details of the
subtitle options.
SUBTITLE
•
Select/change the subtitle
language.
The current subtitle language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display.
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE
then CLEAR.
Note
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to
access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 111.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 61 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
Switching DVD and DivX
soundtracks
DVD-Video DivX
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title
recorded with two or more soundtracks
(often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback.1
Check the disc packaging for details of the
soundtrack options.
Other:
For HDD2 and VR mode content recorded with
bilingual audio, you can switch between left
(L) channel, right (R) channel, or both (L+R).3
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you
can switch between stereo, just the left
channel or just the right channel.
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks.
With these discs you can switch between the
two soundtracks as well as individual
channels in each.
AUDIO
AUDIO
•
Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display.
• The sound may drop out for a few
seconds when switching soundtracks.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital
and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog
audio output when DTS is selected. To
listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect
this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV
amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder
via the digital output. See Connecting to
an AV amplifier or receiver on page 20 for
connection details.
•
Press repeatedly to display/
switch the audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are
indicated on-screen.
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Taiwan and Philippines model:
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left/main channel only
R – Right/SAP channel only
Other:
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left channel only
R – Right channel only
Switching audio channels
CD
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
Stereo – Stereo (default)
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
CD
Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
Video CD WMA/MP3
Super VCD
Taiwan and Philippines model:
For HDD2 and VR mode content that has
both a main and a SAP (Secondary Audio
Programme) audio channel, you can switch
between main (L), SAP (R), or both (L+R).3
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
Note
1 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to
access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 110.
2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 113).
3 When playing a dual mono recording/bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby
Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby
Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 109) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the
audio channel.
61
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 62 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
Switching camera angles
HDD and removable disc activity
display
DVD-Video
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the
HDD and DVD button to switch between the
two kinds of display.
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot
from two or more angles — check the disc
box for details: it should be marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the
same icon appears on screen to let you know
that other angles are available (this can be
switched off if you prefer — see Angle
Indicator on page 114).
The example displays below show highspeed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD
chase playback.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
ANGLE
•
Switch the camera angle.
• The angle number is displayed onscreen.
• If the disc was paused, playback starts
again with the new angle.
Displaying disc information
on-screen
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD DVD
DVD-RW Video
Remain –h––m
Stop
0h08m left
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
Recording time
You can display various on-screen
information about the disc loaded or the
HDD.
Relative playback position
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel programme
DISPLAY
•
Display/change the on-screen
information.
• Press once to show the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity
together. Press again to show the status
of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable
disc).
• To hide the information display, press
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Rem.
: Comedy shows
Indicates copy-protected material
Play
DVD-R Video
3–2
0. 00. 15
Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0h01m52s
4.32Mbps
: 11/21 Soccer game
Indicates the data transfer rate
62
WNBC
Stereo
Copy Once
Indicates a multi-angle scene
Title Name
En
0h35m
!
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 63 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playback
06
Tip
• See Switching camera angles on page 62
for more on multi-angle scene
switching.
• When using the simultaneous play and
record feature, the display shows
information for playback only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source
playback information is displayed.
• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays
become the same as a DVD-Video disc
once the disc is finalized.
• The total recording time figure shown in
parenthesis is calculated based on a
12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed
record setting.
• Recording and playback times for TV
recordings are approximately 0.1 %
shorter than the actual time. This is
because of the slightly different frame
rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.
• The frame number is shown next to the
elapsed time display when the disc is
paused.
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages
may appear in the stop or recording
displays. These indicate that the
broadcast TV programme contains copy
control information.
63
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 64 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
07
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
Chapter 7
Playing and recording from a
DV camcorder
You can play back and record video from a
DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack
on the front panel of this recorder.
Important
• If you connect a second recorder using a
DV cable, you cannot control the second
unit from this one.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from
a component connected to the DV IN
jack.
Playing from a DV camcorder
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
2 From the Initial Setup menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
would like.
See DV Input on page 109 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as
you want them (see Audio In on page 108).
HOME
MENU
3
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video
Playback’ from the Home Menu.
4 Start playback on the camcorder.
Images from the camcorder should appear
on your TV.
64
En
• To record the incoming video, Use the
HDD and DVD button to select the HDD
or a DVD for recording, then press
REC. Press STOP REC to finish
recording.
If there is no signal from the device
connected to the DV jack, or the signal is
copy-protected, recording will pause. It
will automatically restart once there is a
recordable signal.
• The recorder will only start recording
from the DV IN jack if there is a valid
signal. Recording will pause if the signal
is interrupted during recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using
Copy Guard, you will not be able to
record it. See Restrictions on video
recording on page 35 for more details.
Recording from a DV
camcorder
• The source signal must be DVC-SD
format.
• You can’t record date and time
information from DV cassette.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape
is blank, or has copy-protected material
on it, this recorder will pause recording.
Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal.
However, if there is more than two
minutes of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder
should stop (depending on the
camcorder).
Copying from a DV source
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control
both the camcorder and this recorder.
Important
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled
using this recorder’s remote.
• For best results when recording from a
DV camcorder to this recorder, we
recommend cueing the camcorder to the
place you want to start recording from
and setting the camcorder to play-pause.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 65 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
•
REC MODE
2
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
would like.
See DV Input on page 109 for more on this.
•
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as
you want them (see Audio In on page 108).
•
HOME
MENU
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV
Source’ from the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape
loaded.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape
that you want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point
from which you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can
use this recorder’s remote to control the
camcorder using the , , , ,
, and buttons.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.
Stop
1.02.22
Stop
Control with these
buttons
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
HDD
Rem.
SP
(2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
• You can pause or stop the recording by
selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from
the on-screen display. You cannot
•
07
control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
If you restart recording after stopping the
camcorder, the first few seconds of the
camcorder tape will not be recorded.
Use the pause button on your camcorder
instead and recording will start
immediately.
HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:
A chapter marker is inserted every time
there is a break in the timecode on the
DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then
restarted, for example.
If you don’t want to see the DV recording
screen during recording, press DISPLAY
to hide it (press again to display).
While recording, you cannot exit the DV
recording screen using the HOME
MENU or RETURN button.
DV Auto Copy
DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact
copy of the contents of a DV source to the
HDD or a DVD.
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
REC MODE
2
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
require.
See DV Input on page 109 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as
you want them (see Audio In on page 108).
HOME
MENU
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’
from the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape
loaded.
65
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 66 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
07
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
ENTER
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.
The DV tape is rewound to the beginning.
Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played
from the beginning and copied to either the
HDD or a DVD.
• If there is a gap of two minutes or more
between recorded contents, the copying
process is automatically stopped.
• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is
automatically rewound.
• To cancel the copying process, press
STOP REC for more than three
seconds.
About automatic finalization
If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW disc for copying, it will
automatically be finalized after copying is
complete.
• You can’t customize the background for
DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW disc
finalization.
• No title names are assigned.
• If you want to give the disc a name,
please do so before you start the copy
(see Input Disc Name on page 100).
• If a timer recording is scheduled to start,
and in some other instances, the disc
will not be finalized.
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with
the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly
connected. Also make sure that what
you’re trying to record is not copyprotected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off
the camcorder then switch back on.
66
En
Try switching the DV Input setting (see
DV Input on page 109) between Stereo 1
and Stereo 2.1
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 13941995, you can connect a DV camcorder to
this recorder using a DV cable for input of
audio, video, data and control signals.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are
trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DVformat (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital
satellite receivers and Digital VHS video
recorders are not compatible.
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at a time to this recorder.
• You cannot control this recorder from
external equipment connected via the
DV IN jack.
• It may not always be possible to control
the connected camcorder via the DV IN
jack.
• DV camcorders can usually record audio
as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo
tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can
only record one stereo audio track. Set
the DV Input setting as required (see DV
Input on page 109).
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be
32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
• Picture disturbance in the recording
may occur if the source component
pauses playback or plays an unrecorded
section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is
disconnected.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is
no output functionality.
Note
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You
can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 108).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 67 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
Chapter 8
Editing
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
HDD
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
(VR mode)
Original
Play List
Create (page 69)
Play (page 69)
Erase (page 69)
Edit > Title Name (page 70)
Edit > Set Thumbnail
(page 72)
Edit > Erase Section
(page 72)
Edit > Divide (page 73)
Edit > Chapter Edit
(page 73)
Edit > Set Genre (page 74)
Edit > Lock (page 75)
Edit > Move (page 75)
Edit > Combine (page 76)
Genre Name (page 76)
Multi-Mode (page 77)
Undo (page 77)
*1
*1
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
67
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 68 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
The Disc Navigator screen
•
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can
edit video content on unfinalized Video mode
and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD+R/
+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video
content on the internal hard disk drive.
PREV
•
Important
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan
and Philippines model.
•
DISPLAY
Press to change the title
information displayed in the title list.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
Style
101
4 Titles
4 Titles
PlayList
9
10Titles
12/03
11/29 SUN
MON11:00PM
7:00PM
12/03
Sun 11:00PM
11/29Mon
7:00PM 4ch
2chSP SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Original
Original
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
• Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are recently recorded titles that
haven’t yet been played.
Select the HDD or DVD.
DVD
When in the title list, press to
display the previous/next page if there
are more titles than can be displayed.
HDD
DVD
Press to switch between
the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens.
• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR
mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display
the Play List by selecting Play List from
the view options panel (press , then
select Play List from the view options,
then Play List).
• During recording, if you display the Disc
Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles
may appear with a
mark. These titles
were recorded with a Input Line System
setting different to the current setting of
the recorder. During recording, these
titles cannot be played.
HDD
NEXT
•
• Titles that have been recorded with a
Input Line System setting different to the
current setting of the recorder are shown
in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional
information about the TV system settings
on page 117.
1
Press to display the command
menu panel. Use the / and ENTER
buttons to navigate the menus.
DISC NAVIGATOR
DISC NAVIGATOR
2
Display the Disc Navigator
screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you
do this.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible
from the Home Menu.
View options panel
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
All Genres
Available
recording time
Selected
title
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Recent first
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Title thumbnail Title information Command
menu panel
68
En
3
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
Editing accuracy
Some editing commands ask you whether
you want to keep Video mode compatibility
or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible
Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The
edit point is accurate to the exact frame you
choose. However, this accuracy is not
preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is less
precise. The edit point you choose will only
be accurate to within one-half to one second.
On the other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to
make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 69 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
HDD genres
Play
The large capacity of the HDD means that
there may be many hours of video in the
recorder. To help you organize your HDD
video content you can assign different
genres to titles. There are 10 genres in total,
including ten user-definable ones that you
can name as you like.
Create
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1
to play.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and
add titles to it.
Before you can use this command, make
sure that the Play List is switched on in the
view options panel on the left.
Highlight the title you want
ENTER
2
Select ‘Play’ from the
command menu panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
ENTER
1
Select ‘Create’ from the
command menu panel.
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch Edit
SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
1h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
0Titles
No title
4 Titles
9
Recent first
All Genres
Disc Navigator (DVD)
HDD
SP
Play
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
12/03 MON
SUN 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch SP
11/29
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 2ch
4chPlay
SP
11/29Mon
SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Edit
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select an original title to add
to the Play List.
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles
as necessary to the Play List.
Erase
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
When you erase titles from the HDD or
Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the
available recording space increases
accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases
the available recording time only if it is the
last title on the disc.1
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R
(VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not
result in any more free space on the disc.
Note
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
69
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 70 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
08
Editing
ENTER
1
to erase.
Highlight the title you want
3
title.
Input a name for the selected
Input Title Name
ENTER
CAPS
small
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
c £ \ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing
CLEAR when the title is highlighted.
Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.
Title Name
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD
You can give titles new names of up to 64
characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and
HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for
Video mode recordings and DVD+R/+RW
discs.
1
Highlight the title you want
to name (or rename).
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’
from the command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
9
Edit
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9chErase
SP Section
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9chDivide
SP
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7chLock
SP
Genre Name
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
70
En
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
SPName
11/29Mon
2ch
Title SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
OK
Clear
O
ø
ß$%
= > _ &
± { _| } ~ ¡
– ® ˚
1 3
/2 /4 ¿ `
UUUUY
6 7 8 9 <
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x
¨ © a– << ¬
¸ 1 –o 1/4
<<
2
Select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Space
• A name generated automatically by the
recorder will already be in the name
input section of the screen. Use the
REV SCAN/ FWD SCAN
buttons to change the cursor position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper
or lower-case, or use the CASE
SELECTION buttons ( PREV/
NEXT).
• You can also use the CLEAR button to
delete characters directly (press and
hold for two seconds to delete the whole
name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see Using the remote key
shortcuts to input a name below.
• For discs formatted on a different DVD
recorder, you will see only a limited
character set.
ENTER
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name
and return to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator
screen without saving changes to the
title name, press RETURN.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 71 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
Using a USB keyboard to enter a name
The table below shows the remote control
key shortcuts that you can use to input
characters in the name input screen.
Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through
the characters shown.
Using a USB keyboard connected to this
recorder makes entering names very quick
and convenient.1 When in USB keyboard
input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the
lower-left of the screen.2
If you want to enter two characters in
succession that are both on the same button
(for example a P and an R), press
FWD SCAN to advance the cursor one
space manually between inputting the two
characters.
Other than the standard alpha-numeric
keys, use the following keys when entering
names:
(DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only)
Function
Key
Key
Characters
Key
Characters
1
.,’?!–&1
6
mno6öôòó
øñ
F1
2
abc2äàáâ
ãæç
7
pqrs7$
F2
3
def3èéëê
8
tuv8üùûú
4
ghi4îïìí¡
9
wxyz9
5
jkl5£
0
0
[cursor back]
[cursor
forward]
enter
/
[change case] CLEAR
[clear
character]
esc
*1
<space>
+
~
ÿ/ß *1
Change the cursor position
Select CAPS
Select small
delete
Delete character at the current
cursor position
back
space
Delete the character at the
previous cursor position
Enter the name
Exit the input screen
[finish name
input]
()_/:;”`^@#∗%¥|+=
{}[]<>
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
Note
1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See
also Connecting a USB device on page 24 for more connection information.
• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.
2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will
automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB
keyboard input mode.
71
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 72 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
08
Editing
Set Thumbnail
Erase Section
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
Using this command you can delete a part of
a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial
breaks in a recording made from the TV.
You can change the thumbnail picture that
appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to
any frame that appears in that title.
1
Highlight the title containing
the section you want to erase.
1
Highlight the title you want
to change the thumbnail picture for.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’
from the command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’
from the command menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from
which you can find the frame you want.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
ENTER
HDD only: Select the type of
3
edit.
!
10Titles
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
SPSP
11/29Mon
2ch
Title
Name
Erase Section
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch Edit
SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9chDivide
SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7chLock
SP
Genre Name
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
All Genres
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Frame Accurate Editing
1h00m(1.0G)
3 Use the playback controls (, , ,
, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then
press ENTER to set.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Rec. time
2h00m
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
OK
OK
Exit
Exit
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the
playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find the start of the section to erase, then
press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates
the current play position in the title. After
pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of
the section.
Erase Section (HDD)
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
You can also use the chapter and time
search features (press PLAY MODE), and
the
CM SKIP and
CM BACK buttons.
Rec. time
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
From
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the
Edit screen.
72
En
To
Exit
SP
2h00m
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 73 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
ENTER
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the
same way, find the end of the section to
erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker
indicates the end of the section, with the
section itself marked in red.
4 Use the playback controls (, , ,
, etc.) to find the place you want to
divide the title.
Divide Title (HDD)
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Rec. time
SP
2h00m
10Ð1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
Divide
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
to cancel.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few
seconds of video either side of the marked
section to see how the edit will look.
• When editing VR mode Original content,
you may not be able to erase very short
sections (less than five seconds).
Cancel
ENTER
5
Press to divide the title at the
current playback position.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
!
Divide
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Yes
No
Use this command to divide a title into two.
Note that once divided, the two new HDD
titles cannot be recombined into one again.
Chapter Edit
1
Highlight the title you want
to divide.
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on
the HDD you can edit individual chapters
within a title, with commands for erasing,
combining and dividing.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from
the command menu panel.
3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.
!
HDD/DVD RECORDER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
1 Highlight the title that contains the
chapters you want to edit.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’
from the command menu panel.
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
ENTER
HDD only: Select the type of
3
edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.
!
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
73
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 74 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
08
Editing
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.
4 Select the command you want:
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or
more parts: Use the playback controls
(, , , , etc.) to find the point at
which you want to divide the chapter,
then press ENTER.
• Combine3 – Combine two adjacent
chapters into one: Highlight the bar
divider between two adjacent chapters
and press ENTER.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Rec. time
1
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
2
3
1h00m
4
5
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Rec. time
Chapters
1–1
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
1h00m
5
0.00.00
Play
ENTER
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the
main Disc Navigator screen.
You can keep dividing the chapter as
many times as you wish (up to 999
chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or
99 chapters per HDD title).
• Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move
chapters: Select the chapter you want to
erase/move and press ENTER. Select
whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Move command only: Select the
destination for the chapter, and press
ENTER.
Set Genre
HDD
Use this command to assign a genre to a
title.
1
Highlight the title you want
to assign a genre to.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from
the command menu panel.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Erase
1h00m
Rec. time
Move
0h01m
Chapter
Cancel
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
001
002
003
004
005
4 Titles
9
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7chLock
SP
Genre Name
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
All Genres
74
En
Erase Section
Edit
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
Divide
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03
Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
SPSP
11/29Mon
2ch
Title
Name
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been
divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into
one.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 75 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
ENTER
3
Select a genre for the title.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
9
Recent first
8
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
11/29Mon
2ch
12/03
Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
SPSP
Title
name
No
Category
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
Free1
Erase
Edit Section
Free2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
Edit Chapter
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch Free3
SP
Divide
Free4
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Free5
Genre Name
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7chLock
SP
Free6
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
All Genres
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
An unlocked title will become locked; a
locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a
padlock icon.
Move
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing
order of Play List titles.
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
1
to move.
Lock
Highlight the title you want
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the
command menu panel.
DVD-RAM
Original only
Disc Navigator (DVD)
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited
or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it,
you can always unlock it later.
10Titles
1
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch
SP
TitleSP
Name
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
Divide
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
4 Titles
Erase
EditSection
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
Combine
Play List
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before
changing the lock status. You also can’t
undo a lock/unlock command using the
Undo option from the Disc Navigator
menu.
1 Highlight the title you want to lock
(or unlock).
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
3
title.
Select a new position for the
Title to move
Disc Navigator (DVD)
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Erase Section
9
Edit
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
Divide
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7chLock
SP
Genre Name
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
All Genres
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
Insert position
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
12/03
11/29 SUN
MON11:00PM
7:00PM
12/03
Sun 11:00PM
11/29Mon
7:00PM 4ch
2chSP SP
4 Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
SPSP
11/29Mon
2ch
Title
Name
10Titles
11
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play
List is displayed.
75
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 76 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
08
Editing
Combine
ENTER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to combine two Play List
titles into one.
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
!
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
Yes
1
Highlight the title you want
to combine.
This title will remain in the same place after
combining with another title.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from
the command menu panel.
No
Genre Name
HDD
Use this command to rename one of the ten
user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 10).
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch
SP
TitleSPName
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
Divide
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
4 Titles
Play List
3
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the
command menu panel.
10Titles
Erase
EditSection
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
Combine
101
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
4
9
11/29 WED 7:00PM
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Recent first
1h00m(1.0G)
3
Select another title to
combine with the first.
This title will be appended to the first title
selected.
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be
appended to title 1.
Edit
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
All Genres
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
ENTER
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
2
Select one of the userdefinable genre names.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11
4 Titles
2
Play List
12/03 SUN 11:00PM
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
3
4
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
Free4
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Erase
Free2
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Free6
8
Free7Name
Genre
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
All Genres
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
11/29 WED 7:00PM
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Free3
Edit
Free5
Recent first
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
Free1
11/29Mon
2ch SP
SP
4 Titles
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
10Titles
101
10Titles
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
3
76
En
Input a name for the genre.
• The name can be up to 12 characters
long.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 77 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Editing
08
• For information on remote control key
short cuts, see Using the remote key
shortcuts to input a name on page 71.
Input Genre Name
Free 1
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
c £ \ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
OK
Clear
O
ø
ß$%
= > _ &
± { _| } ~ ¡
– ® ˚
1 3
/2 /4 ¿ `
UUUUY
6 7 8 9 <
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x
¨ © a– << ¬
¸ 1 –o 1/4
<<
CAPS
small
ENTER
3
Select the command that you
want applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the
marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Lock
Unlock
9
Change Genre
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
8
Single Mode
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
ENTER
4
and exit.
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name
10 Titles
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Space
Multi-Mode
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP
Erase
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
Once the command is completed, MultiMode is automatically exited.
Multi-Mode
HDD
Undo
Multi-Mode allows you to select several
titles, then select a command that will be
applied to all of them. In this way you can
select multiple titles and then erase them all
at once, for example.
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
If you make a mistake while editing, you can
generally undo it. There is one level of undo
(in other words, you can only undo the last
edit you made).
ENTER
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
Recent first
Edit
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
8
All Genres
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
4 Titles
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
0Titles
11/29 MON 7:00PM
Play
No title
11/29Mon
7:00PM 2ch SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
12/03
11/29 SUN
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03
Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
ENTER
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the
command menu panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the
Disc Navigator screen.
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
1h00m(1.0G)
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
2
Select titles from the title list.
Selected titles are marked with a .
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
77
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 78 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
08
Editing
Frequently asked questions
• Why doesn’t the available recording time
increase when I erase titles from a VR
mode DVD-R?
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or
DVD+R), the titles are no longer
displayed, but the content remains on
the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.
• I can’t edit my disc!
You may find that as the available
recording time is reduced on a VR mode
DVD-R disc, editing is no longer
possible. This is because information
about your edits requires a certain
amount of disc space. As you edit, this
information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
78
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 79 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Copying and backup
09
Chapter 9
Copying and backup
Introduction
Restrictions on copying
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected
using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be
copied to the HDD.
• Back up important recordings stored on
the HDD to a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the
HDD to play in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD
for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to
DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the
One Touch Copy feature. This copies the
currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD
title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below
for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you
can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and
edit titles so that you only copy the bits you
want. See Using Copy Lists on page 81 for
detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your
recordings at high-speed. Depending on the
recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and
various other factors, copying can be as fast
as one minute per hour of video. See
Minimum copying times on page 119 for
more on copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy
video at a lower recording quality (for
example, an XP recording on the HDD
copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way
is always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW,
the chapter markers in the original material
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into
the copy at intervals, according to the Auto
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter
(Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on
page 112).
Some video material is copy-once protected.
This means that it can be recorded to HDD,
but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you
want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a
CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW,
ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRMcompatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on
page 36 for more on this). Only one instance
of a copy-once protected title can be added
to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,
the title is erased from the HDD (it is
therefore not possible to copy a locked title
that is copy-once protected).
You can identify copy-once protected
material during playback by displaying disc
information on-screen. If the current title is
copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only
for lawful copying and you are advised to
check carefully what is lawful copying in the
country in which you are making a copy.
Copying of copyright material such as films
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a
legal exception or consented to by the
rightowners.
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the
currently playing or selected (in the Disc
Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to
HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
79
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 80 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
09
Copying and backup
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same
recording mode. When copying DVD to
HDD, the copy is made in whatever
recording mode is currently set.
•
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is
loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.
REC MODE
1
If you’re copying from DVD to
the HDD, select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher
than the title playing will not result in a better
quality recording.
•
•
ONE TOUCH
COPY
2
Press during playback to copy
the current title.
The front panel display indicates that the title
is being copied.
• High-speed copying is used when
copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback
continues while copying.
• Real-time copying is used when copying
from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts
from the beginning of the title.
Cancelling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s
started.
•
•
•
ONE TOUCH
COPY
•
Press and hold for more than a
second.
Copying is cancelled and the video already
copied is erased.
•
•
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy,
the space available for recording does
not return to the pre-copy figure.
•
Notes on copying using One Touch
Copy
Copying to DVD
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as
thumbnail picture markers for the Disc
Navigator, are also copied. However, if
you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
80
En
or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40
characters of a name are copied.
The chapter markers in the copy may not
be in exactly the same positions as the
original when recording on to a DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
You can’t use the One Touch Copy
function to copy a title if any part of the
title is copy-once protected.
A title that contains mixed aspect ratios
can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/
-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this
type of material.
Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1)
widescreen material can’t be copied to a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/
+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or
DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
When HDD Recording Format is set to
Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/
MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be highspeed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a
DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM.
Recordings of dual mono/bilingual
broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW
(VR mode) or DVD-RAM.
XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via
One Touch Copy.
Titles over eight hours cannot be copied
to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using
One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs
for titles over eight hours.
Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP
or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/
+RW using One Touch Copy.
Copying to the HDD
• The maximum title length for copying is
12 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also
copied, except when copying from a
finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW.
Note
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 81 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Copying and backup
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter
markers for the Disc Navigator are
copied, but their position in the copy
may be slightly changed from the
original.
• If some part of the title being copied is
copy-protected, copying will start, but
the copy-protected portions will not be
copied.
Using Copy Lists
09
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode)
disc for the copy, make sure it is
initialized before you start.
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘HDD DVD’.
If this is the first time to create a Copy List,
skip to step 5 below.
* See also Copyright on page 79.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of
HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.
When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can,
however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or renaming titles, for example. Edits you make to
titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual
video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the
Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the
knowledge that the actual content is not
being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
Important
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan
and Philippines model.
• The recorder can only store one Copy List
at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line
System setting is changed (see
Additional information about the TV
system settings on page 117).
• Resetting the recorder to its factory
settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 134) will erase the Copy List.
1
Load a recordable DVD.
• It is possible to complete the following
steps without having a recordable DVD
loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD
loaded); however, the steps are slightly
different.
HDD
DVD
DVD/CD
HDD
Disc Back-up
4 If there is already a Copy List stored
in the recorder, choose whether to
‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue
Using Previous Copy List’.
Continue Using Previous Copy List
Create New Copy List
• If you select Continue Using Previous
Copy List, skip to step 10 below.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will
erase any Copy List already stored in the
recorder.
ENTER
5
Add titles to the Copy List
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).
Copy
Recent first
All Genres
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Select Title
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G) 2ch
Free1
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
SP
0.0G
4.3G
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are
highlighted in pink.
81
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 82 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
09
Copying and backup
There are some restrictions on titles that can
be added to the Copy List if you are copying
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/
+RW:
• When adding titles that contain copyonce protected material, the copy-once
parts will not be added.
• When adding titles that contain material
of more than one aspect ratio (screen
size), each part with a different aspect
ratio will be added as a separate title if
high-speed copying is possible.
Depending on the title1, high-speed copying
may not be possible to DVDs.
6 Press to display the command
menu panel.
The Command Menu panel
Copy
Recent first
All Genres
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Select Title
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G) 2ch
SP
Free1
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title
Edit screen.
Copy
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1
2
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch
SP
SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM
2ch
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
82
En
8 To edit a title, highlight it using the
/ buttons, then press ENTER.
Copy
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1
2
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch
SP
Erase
SP
Title Name
Back
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Next
Cancel
11/29Wed 7:00PM
2ch
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
A menu of editing commands appears:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the
Copy List (see Erase on page 69).
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in
the Copy List (see Title Name on
page 70).
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see
Erase Section on page 72).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the
Copy List (see Move on page 75).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in
the Copy List.
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List
into two (see Divide on page 73).
• Combine – Combine two titles in the
Copy List into one (see Combine on
page 76).
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a
Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on
page 73):
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/
Change the chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters
into one.
4.3G
4.3G
Note
1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:
• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8
(Video Mode On)).
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Dual mono/Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:
• XP+ titles.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 83 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Copying and backup
09
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail
frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on
page 72).
• Recording Mode – Set the picture
quality of the copy (see Recording Mode
on page 84).
• Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual – Set how
dual mono/bilingual audio should be
copied when copying from HDD to DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW (see
Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual on page 85).
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have
that need editing.
• Select Finalize if you want to
automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.1
Select a title menu style from the
following screen.
ENTER
11
copying.
Copy
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
1>2>3
Start Copy
HDD
DVD-RW
Video Mode
0h 16m
Display the command menu
ENTER
10
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
Copy
Input Disc Name
Recording Mode
Disc Name
High-Speed
Finalize
Finalize
Off
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
9
panel.
Back
Recording Mode
Copy Time
4.3G
4.3G
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL
disc and the copy will span both layers,
the Copy List Total bar will be purple.
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be
half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL
or DVD+R DL disc is already full.
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1
2
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch
SP
SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM
2ch
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
There are several options available from the
next screen:
• Select Recording Mode if you want to
change the recording quality (see
Recording Mode on page 84).
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to
change the disc name. Input a name of
up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or
40 characters for a Video mode disc or
DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is
similar to that of naming titles; see Title
Name on page 70.)
Copying from DVD to HDD
Important
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t
accessible when a finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As
long as the disc is not Copy Guard
protected, you can still use the One
Touch Copy function, however (See One
Touch Copy on page 79).
• The recorder can only store one Copy List
at a time.
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are
erased or edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List
and Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or
finalized.
Note
1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
83
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 84 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Copying and backup
09
– the recorder is reset to its factory
settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 134).
• It may not be possible to copy from a
DVD disc that was recorded on a
different DVD recorder or a PC.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
Menu.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have
that need editing.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Next’ from the
command menu panel to proceed to the
copy options screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to
change the recording quality (see
Recording Mode below).
ENTER
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.
2
ENTER
3
Select a Copy List type.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will
erase any Copy List already stored in the
recorder.
ENTER
8
copying.
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start
Recording Mode
ENTER
ENTER
4
Add titles to the Copy List
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are
highlighted in pink.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Next’ from the
command menu panel to proceed to the
title edit screen.
ENTER
6
Select a title to edit.
A menu appears of Copy List editing
commands:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the
Copy List (see Erase on page 69).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the
Copy List (see Move on page 75).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in
the Copy List.
84
En
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from
the command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select a recording mode for
the copy.
• High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is
copied at the same recording quality as
the original.
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy
List is copied at the specified recording
quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy
at a higher quality setting than the
original, the copy will not be better
quality than the original.)
If you select MN above, you can also
change the level setting (MN1 to
MN323, LPCM or XP+4) from the
Recording Quality box that appears.
Note
1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in
exactly the same position as the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 112).
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 85 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Copying and backup
• Optimized1,2 – The recording quality is
automatically adjusted so that the Copy
List fits on to the space available on the
disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.
When you change the recording mode
setting, you can see how much disc space it
will require. If this is more than is available,
it shows up in red and you won’t be able to
start copying. In this case, either change the
recording quality, or press RETURN to go
back to the Copy List screen and erase one
or more titles from the Copy List.
Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual
1
Select the title containing the
audio you want to change.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Dual Mono Audio/
Bilingual’ from the command menu
panel.
09
ENTER
2
Select a backup option.
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
There are three backup options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making
a backup of a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the
backup data already on the HDD to a
recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup
data on the HDD.
3 Load the disc you want to make a
backup of.
You can only make backup copies of
finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs,
finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs
(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).
Disc Back-up
ENTER
3
Select a dual mono audio/
bilingual option.
No disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Using disc backup
* See also Copyright on page 79.
This feature offers a simple way to make a
backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) discs or DVD+R/+RW discs. The
data is copied first to the hard disk drive3,
then on to another recordable DVD disc.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’
from the Home Menu.
Cancel
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start’.
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press
DISPLAY.
Note
1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 112).
2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you
copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc.
3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
85
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 86 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
09
Copying and backup
• You can cancel the backup process by
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second.
5 When the data has been copied, take
out the disc and load a blank* recordable
DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the
disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the
previous contents of the disc will be erased in
the backup process.
Disc Back-up
• You can cancel the backup process by
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second. However, this will
make the disc unusable (although if you
are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc
you can re-initialize it in order to make it
usable again — see Initializing recordable
DVD discs on page 50.)
7 After the recorder has finished
recording the backup disc, you can select
whether to make another backup of the
same data or exit.
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Disc Back-up
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc
Disc back-up finished.
Start
Cancel
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc,
or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the
backup.
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW,
you cannot undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary
so there may be cases where the
contents of the disc you’re backing-up
will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of
disc.
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up
to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW
discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/
+RW discs.
6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the
backed-up data to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press
DISPLAY.
86
En
Start
Cancel
• Select Start to make another backup
copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to
make another backup copy, return to
step 6 above.
8 If you don’t need to keep the backup
data on the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD;
select No to keep it (you can delete it later if
you want to).
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes
No
• If you decide to leave the backup data on
the HDD, you can make backup copies
to recordable DVD discs anytime from
the Disc Back-up menu.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 87 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Using the Jukebox
10
Chapter 10
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the
recorder’s HDD to store and playback music
from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also
transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/
-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC (USB function
only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR-550HS). Once on the HDD, you can name albums
and tracks, assign them a genre, and set
tracks that you don’t want to play to Jump.
Copying music to the HDD
The first step is to copy some music to the
HDD. CD audio, WMA and MP3 files are
copied at high speed. All tracks are copied
from each CD/DVD as an album.1
WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied
along with the audio. CD album and track
names are not copied, but you can add these
later (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 91).
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in
the order they appear on the CD/DVD.
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks
cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc.
Important
• While copying, no other recorder
operation is possible.
• When copying, scheduled timer
recordings will not start until copying is
complete.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy
successfully.
1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy
to the HDD.
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the
CD or all WMA/MP3 files on the DVD are
copied to the HDD.
• You can also start copying by starting
playback of the CD/DVD and then
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY.
• To cancel copying press ENTER.
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio
tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part
currently selected will play.
Copying files via USB
(DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only)
Connecting a regular USB device
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a
connected USB device, such as a USB drive,
to the HDD.
1
Connect the USB device.
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Listen to Music from
USB Device’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Copy Album’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
The selected folder on the USB device will be
copied to the HDD.
Note
1 • Up to 999 albums can be created in the Jukebox. If you copy via Connect PC, the total number of albums you
are able to create may be less than 999 (for more information, see page 89).
• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.
• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a
live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks.
87
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 88 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
10
Using the Jukebox
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB
device can be copied/displayed.
Connect PC
Using a USB connection, you can copy
WMA and MP3 files from a PC to the HDD of
this device. Operations carried out on the PC
require Windows Media Player 10.
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Connect PC’.
ENTER
Important
• If the PC you are using does not currently
have Windows Media Player 10 installed,
you must first install the program and
make sure it functions correctly before
connecting the USB cable and attempting
to use the Connect PC function.
• For more information on Connect PC,
see Using a PC on page 25.
• You cannot edit or delete albums from
this device when it is connected to a PC
via USB. If you wish to edit or delete
albums via the Jukebox, you must first
disconnect the USB cable.
1 Connect the PC via USB cable.
The screen below is displayed. Choose ‘Take
no action’ and click ‘OK’.
*Depending on the settings for Windows
Media Player 10, the screen shown below
may not be displayed.
'Take no action'
'OK'
88
En
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
to cancel.
5 Verify that the import screen is
displayed on the device.
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes,
the import screen is automatically closed. To
reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2
through 4.
Status
Number of copied
folders
Number of files
unable to be copied
Connect PC
Standby
000 Folders
000000 Files
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
Number of copied files
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 89 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Using the Jukebox
10
6 Open Windows Media Player 10 on
the PC.
The device settings screen appears. Click
‘Cancel’.
For more information refer to the Help menu
of Windows Media Player 10.
Progress Bar
*Depending on the settings for Windows
Media Player 10, the screen shown below
may not be displayed.
Connect PC
Copying
001 Folders
000003 Files
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
'Cancel'
From the PC, in Windows Media Player 10:
1. Click ‘Library’.
2. Choose the artist, album or song
you would like to copy, and press the
right mouse button.
3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’ (when
choosing songs, click ‘Add to’ then
‘Sync list’).
4. Click ‘Start Sync’.
This begins the synchronization process.
When finished, the message ‘Synchronized
to Device’ is displayed in Windows Media
Player 10.
• To cancel the synchronization process
while it is underway, press ENTER on the
remote control. The Connect PC screen
is closed.
• If synchronization fails, make sure that
the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder device
is selected at the synchronization screen
of Windows Media Player 10, and try
again.
7 When you have finished copying
files, close Windows Media Player 10 on
the PC.
ENTER
8
Close the import screen on this
device.
• If no actions are carried out for 20
minutes after copying, the import screen
is automatically closed.
Note
• When using the sync function of
Windows Media Player 10, music, artist
and album folders are created as
follows:
Root
Music
Artist 1
Album 1
music1.mp3
music2.mp3
Artist 2
'Start Sync'
Album 2
music1.wma
Album 1
music1.mp3
89
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 90 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
10
Using the Jukebox
• Folders containing no files are not
displayed in the Jukebox (such as the
above ‘Artist1’ and ‘Artist2’ folders), but
do count toward the maximum of 999
folders allowed in Jukebox.
• Up to 999 tracks can be included in one
album. Note that when there are many
tracks contained in one album, it may
take time to display and transfer these
tracks.
• Albums and tracks with no set name that
are transferred from CD/DVD/USB are
displayed as ‘UnknownAlbum’ and
‘UnknownFile’ in Windows Media Player
10.
• Album and track names that do not
conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may
display differently in Windows Media
Player 10 and the Jukebox.
• When albums are deleted in the
Jukebox, their file hierarchy as displayed
in Windows Media Player may change.
• File whose extensions are not supported
by the Jukebox (i.e. files that are not
.mp3 or .wma) cannot be transferred.
• Files imported to this recorder via
Connect PC cannot be exported from
this recorder.
• Note that no recording functions,
including timer recordings, will be
carried out when you are using the
Connect PC function.
Playing music from the
Jukebox
You can select albums or individual tracks
from the Jukebox to play.
ENTER
2
Select a Jukebox option.
• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or
WMA/MP3 files that have been copied to
the HDD.
• Listen to Music from USB device –
Listen to music from an external USB
device.
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
The screen below shows albums stored on
the HDD:
Album name
Jukebox
By number
All Genres
HDD
Remain
47.0 G
Album1
4
Album2
1
Erase
5
Album3
2
Edit
6
Album4
3
Play Mode
7
Album5
4
8
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
Play
ALL
Genre Name
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12
70 MB
Info for selected album
3-10
0.03.58
Playback status
• If you select a whole album to play, all
tracks that are not set to Jump will play.
• If you want to start playback from a
selected track in an album, or play a
track that is set to Jump, press to
enter the track list then select a track to
play.
Track name
Jukebox
By number
All Genres
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
Menu.
For DVR-450H-S, skip to step 3.
10Albums
3
10Albums
3
Album1
4
Album2
1 Mars
Erase
5
Album3
2 Venus
Edit
6
Album4
3 Mercury
Play Mode
7
Album5
4 Jupiter
8
Album6
5 Saturn
9
Album7
10
Album8
Play
ALL
Genre Name
6 Uranus
7 Neptune
Jupiter
HDD
Remain
47.0 G
classical
MP3
8 MB
3-10
0.03.58
• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change
the page.
90
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 91 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Using the Jukebox
10
Editing Jukebox albums
Changing the album view
1
From the album list, display
the view options menu panel.
Select a view option.
Jukebox
10Albums
3
Sort order
4
By number
number
ByBynumber
By favourite
5
By album
6
Genre
Genres
All All
Genres
Cancel
HDD
Remain
47.0 G
Album1
Album2
ENTER
Play
ALL
2
1
Erase
Album3
2
Edit
Album4
3
Play Mode
7
Album5
4
8
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
Genre Name
6
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12
70 MB
3-10
0.03.58
ENTER
Select what you want to edit.
ENTER
By number – Albums are listed by the
album number.
By favourite – Most often listened to
music appears at the top of the list.
By album – Albums are listed
alphabetically.
• Genre
Jukebox
10Albums
3
Sort order
4
All Genres
number
By By
number
No Category
5
Best
Album1
Album2
ALL
Play
1
Erase
Album3
2
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Rock
6
Album4
3
Pop
Genres
All All
Genres
7
Album5
4
Jazz
8
Classical
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
HDD
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’.
3
7
• Sort order
Remain
47.0 G
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
Menu.
For DVR-450H-S, skip to step 3.
ENTER
2
A number of commands are available for
editing and changing the playback behavior
of albums.
Genre Name
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12
70 MB
3-10
0.03.58
All Genres – All albums are displayed.
Genre – Only albums in the selected
genre are displayed.
4
Select an edit function from
the command menu panel.
• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all
tracks in an album are selected, the
whole album is erased).
• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of
up to 64 characters for the album. See
page Title Name on page 70 for how to
enter names.
• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up
to 64 characters for the track. See page
Title Name on page 70 for how to enter
names.
• Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the
genre for the album.
• Edit > Jump Set1 – Set a track to jump
so that it doesn’t play (choose this
command again to cancel the Jump
setting).
• Play Mode – Change the playback order
for albums and tracks.
• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12
characters for a genre. See page Title
Name on page 70 for how to enter
names.
Note
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
91
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 92 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
11
The PhotoViewer
Chapter 11
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG
photos and picture files stored on the HDD,
recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a
USB-equipped digital camera (USB function
only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR550H-S).1 You can also import files and save
them to the recorder’s HDD or a DVD-R/-RW
disc.
Important
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown
in this manual are for the Taiwan and
Philippines model.
• Copy Files from a Digital Camera
(DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only) – Copy all
DCF files directly from a connected
digital camera to a recordable DVD-R/
-RW.
ENTER
3
Select the folder containing
the files you want to view, copy or edit.
The first image from the selected folder is
displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the
screen. From the Folder Information
column, you can change thumbnails via the
REV SCAN/ FWD SCAN buttons.
Locating JPEG picture files
Currently selected
folder in folder list
PhotoViewer HDD
HOME
MENU
Select Folder
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the
Home Menu.
Folder
ENTER
2
Select the location of the files
you want to view or edit.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
FOLDER
MENU
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
View/Edit Photos on the HDD
Folder information
1/3
Pages in
folder list
View Photos on a CD/DVD
View Photos on a USB Device
Copy Files from a Digital Camera
• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View
or edit photos already stored on the
recorder’s HDD.
• View Photos on a CD/DVD – View
photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CDR/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.
• View Photos on a USB Device (DVR650H-S/DVR-550H-S only) – View photos
on a digital camera (or other USB
device) connected to the USB port.
92
En
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected
USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB
device on page 94).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 93 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The PhotoViewer
11
ENTER
4
Select the file you want to
view, copy or edit.
Currently selected
thumbnail
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
FILE
MENU
1/84
Pages in
file list
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes
the recorder to load the file.
• You can change folders via the
REV SCAN/ FWD SCAN buttons.
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,
check that the disc and file formats are
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG
file compatibility and PC-created disc
compatibility on page 11).
• The thumbnail of files that cannot be
played is displayed as the
logo.
Changing the display style of
the PhotoViewer
You can choose to display photos by grouping
them by folder, file, or number of thumbnails.
1
panel.
Display the View Options
The View Options panel
Folder2
File
File
Style
12 Files
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then
press ENTER.
The display mode will change to that which
you have chosen.
Playing a slideshow
ENTER
1
Select a folder from the folder
list.
To start the slideshow from the first file in the
folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the
desired folder and pressing .
2
Select a thumbnail.
• Use PREV and NEXT to display
the previous/next page of thumbnails.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or
‘Start Audio Slideshow’ from the menu.
When you select ‘Start Audio Slideshow’,
you are prompted to select the Genre of
music you would like to hear, and when you
press ENTER, music of that Genre stored on
the Jukebox will be played during the
slideshow.
For more information on adding music to the
HDD, see Using the Jukebox on page 87.
PhotoViewer HDD
Display Mode
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ or
‘Style’ then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
• Display Mode – Choose between folder
and file display modes.
• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4
and 12 thumbnails.
Folder Size 999 MB
FILE
MENU
1/84
• You can also select a file or folder then
press PLAY to start playing the
slideshow.
• Use PREV/ NEXT to display the
previous/next picture, or PAUSE to
pause the slideshow.
93
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 94 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The PhotoViewer
11
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some
pictures may be displayed with black
bars top and bottom, or left and right.
• Large picture files may take a few
seconds to display. This is normal.
STOP
4
Reloading files from a disc or
USB device
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the
images using the reload function.
Press to return to the thumbnail.
• You can also use the RETURN button.
HOME
MENU
5
Press to exit the PhotoViewer.
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of
two or four. You can also move the area of
the picture displayed.
ENTER
1
Press during the slideshow to
zoom the picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is
displayed on-screen.
2
Use to move the zoomed area.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a
slideshow so you can always view pictures
the right way up, whichever way they were
taken.
ANGLE
•
Press during the slideshow to
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by
90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the
picture in increments of 90º.
1
Navigate to the last entry in
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
ENTER
2
Load the next batch of up to 999
files/99 folders from the disc or
connected USB device (USB function only
works with DVR-650H-S and DVR550H-S).
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes)
to load in the images.1
Importing files to the HDD
You can import files and save them to the
HDD2 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB
camera (USB function only works with DVR650H-S and DVR-550H-S). Once on the HDD
you can edit and organize your pictures and
print them out if you’ve connected a
PictBridge-compatible printer (USB function
only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR550H-S).
ENTER
1
Select the location of folders/
files you want to import.
To import a whole folder, select the desired
folder, press , and skip to step 3 below.
• To import multiple folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 95.
2
Select a file to import, then
press ..
• To import multiple files, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 95.
94
En
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.)
2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 95 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The PhotoViewer
11
ENTER
3
menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the
3
menu.
PhotoViewer CD/DVD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
Folder Size 999 MB
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
Start Audio Slideshow
003
Folder3
New Folder
Print
004
Folder4
Folder Options
Detailed Information FILE
005
Folder5
Copy to DVD
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
Start Slideshow
Copy all to HDD
Folder
Copy to HDD
MENU
Multi-Mode
HDD
FOLDER
MENU
Multi-Mode
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
Remain
100.0 G
1/84
Start Slideshow
1/3
ENTER
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and
copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to
cancel.
• The files will be copied to the HDD with
the same folder structure as the original.
• Importing to the HDD will not work if
there is insufficient space on the HDD,
or if there are already the maximum
number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).
4
Select files/folders from the
list.
An orange check mark box () is shown by
the item you selected. A blue check mark
box () appears on the folder select screen
when files from that folder are selected.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder
Selecting multiple files or
folders
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple
folders/files at once for importing or editing.
5
ENTER
1
Select the folder containing
the files you want to import.
Multi-Mode
Select Folder
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
FOLDER
MENU
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
1/3
Display the command menu.
ENTER
6
Select the command you want
to apply to all the selected items.
2
Display the command menu.
95
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 96 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
11
The PhotoViewer
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW
(DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only)
Using this feature you can copy all the files1
(including audio and movie files) stored on a
connected USB camera to a recordable DVD
disc.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on
the disc as a Video mode title, making it
possible to view the photos on other DVD
players/recorders that may not be
compatible with JPEG file playback.
Once the files have been copied, the disc is
automatically finalized.
Important
• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that
has already been initialized for Video
mode recording but has nothing yet
recorded on it. Discs that have already
been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW
discs) cannot be used.
• After backing up the pictures in your
digital camera to DVD, we recommend
verifying that they have been recorded
properly before deleting anything from
the camera.
1 Press HOME MENU and select
‘PhotoViewer’ to display the
PhotoViewer screen.
2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
3 Select ‘Copy Files from a Digital
Camera’ from the menu.
4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to
cancel.
• Note that during copying, any timer
programmes set to start will not begin,
and no other operations are possible.
Copying selected files to a
DVD-R/-RW
This feature allows you just to copy some of
the files stored on HDD to a DVD.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on
the disc as a Video mode title, making it
possible to view the photos on other DVD
players/recorders that may not be
compatible with JPEG file playback. Note
however that you may need to finalize the
disc before it will play on another DVD player
(copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
Important
• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be
recorded.
• One slideshow title can contain up to 99
files. If there are more files than this in
the slideshow, multiple slideshows are
created on the disc.
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD
the slideshow will become unplayable
but the free space will not increase.
1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
ENTER
View/Edit Photos on the HDD
View Photos on a CD/DVD
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on
the HDD’ from the menu.
View Photos on a USB Device
Copy Files from a Digital Camera
96
En
ENTER
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s)
you want to copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files
contained in it.
Note
1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data you can copy at one time.
• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 97 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The PhotoViewer
11
• To copy multiple folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 95.
ENTER
4
menu.
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• Folder names on the disc will be
number PIONR. File names will be
PHOT number.
• Note that during copying, any timer
programmes set to start will not begin,
and no other operation is possible.
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can
press ENTER to cancel.
Erasing a file or folder
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)
you want to erase.
• To erase multiple files or folders, use the
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files
or folders on page 95.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files
contained in it. Please be careful!
• You can’t erase files that have been
locked.
• Folders containing locked files can’t be
erased. Unlocked files in the folder,
however, will be erased.
2
Display the command menu.
Editing files on the HDD
ENTER
There are a number of commands you can
use to edit and organize your pictures stored
on the HDD.
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
Creating a new folder
File
12 Files
1
From the folder list, display
the menu.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
1/84
ENTER
2
Select ‘New Folder’.
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder
list with the name F_number.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
PhotoViewer HDD
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
Select Folder
Folder
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
Start Audio Slideshow
003
Folder3
New Folder
004
Folder4
Folder Options
005
Folder5
Copy to DVD
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
Start Slideshow
FOLDER
MENU
Multi-Mode
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
File
12 Files
HDD
1/3
• There can be up to 999 folders on the
HDD.
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
97
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 98 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The PhotoViewer
11
ENTER
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
to cancel.
• You can also erase a file or folder by
pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is
highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
to cancel.
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there
is insufficient space on the HDD; if there
are already the maximum number of
files and/or folders on the HDD.
Copying files
Naming files and folders
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)
you want to copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files
contained in it.
• To copy multiple files or folders, use the
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files
or folders on page 95.
1 Select the file or folder you want to
rename.
You can’t rename files that have been
locked.
2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’.
3 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename
Folder’.
PhotoViewer HDD
2
Folder2
Display the command menu.
File
ENTER
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’.
12 Files
HDD
ENTER
4
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder
Contents’.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.
File names or Folder names can be up to 64
characters long.
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input
a name and Using a USB keyboard to enter a
name on page 71 for how to enter a name.
MENU
Locking/Unlocking files
1/84
5
Select a folder to copy the
folder(s)/file(s) to.
98
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
ENTER
En
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Locking files will protect them from
accidental erasure and prevent them from
being renamed.
Use the same process to both lock and
unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the
PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 99 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The PhotoViewer
11
Printing files
1
Select the file(s) you want to
lock (or unlock).
• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders,
use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting
multiple files or folders on page 95.
2
Display the command menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’.
ENTER
(DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only)
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer
to the USB port will enable you to print out
picture files1 stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD
or directly from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital
camera if you are using that as a source) is
connected to the recorder before starting.
1
Select the file(s) you want to
print.
• To print multiple files, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 95.
4
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder
Contents’.
2
Display the command menu.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
ENTER
3
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer HDD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Folder2
File
1/84
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon
next to them. To remove all locks within a
given folder, choose ‘Folder Option’ >
‘Unlock Folder Contents’.
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
1/84
To view detailed information
ENTER
This feature allows you to check the settings
of the camera from which you imported the
photos.
1 Choose the file for which you would
like to see detailed information.
2 Choose ‘Detailed Information’.
When no detailed information is available,
nothing is displayed.
4
Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or
‘Cancel’ to cancel.
• Once printing has started, you can
cancel by pressing ENTER.
Tip
• Paper size and layout can be set; the
options available depend on your printer
— check the printer manual for details.
• This recorder may not work correctly
with all printers.
Note
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
99
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 100 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
12
The Disc Setup menu
Chapter 12
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name
discs, lock the contents to prevent
accidental recording and erasure, initialize
and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu.
Basic settings
Lock Disc
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
• Default setting: Off
Locking the disc will prevent accidental
recording, editing or erasing of the disc.
Important
Input Disc Name
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
When you initialize a disc for recording, the
recorder automatically assigns a name for
the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You
can use the Input Disc Name function to
change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when
you load the disc and when you display disc
information on-screen.
• A locked disc can still be initialized
(which will completely erase the disc).
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’
then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Disc Setup
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
Basic
Input Disc Name
On
Initialize
Lock Disc
Off
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
ENTER
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc
Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
Initialize
Lock Disc
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Next Screen
Optimize HDD
Set to On to prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you
need to unlock the disc to make edits, select
Off.
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
DVD-RW
ENTER
3
Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters
long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video
mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.
• See Title Name on page 70 for more on
navigating the input screen.
100
En
• Default setting: VR Mode
Initialization mode is automatically carried
out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You
must set the desired initialization mode
before inserting a disc.
See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 51 for
detailed instructions.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 101 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Disc Setup menu
Initialize settings
12
Undo Finalize
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW
disc for either VR mode or Video mode
recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc,
it will be automatically initialized for
recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see
page 51).
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recording when you load them, but it is also
possible to initialize them for VR mode
recording.1
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be
initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.
When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR
mode.
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 50 for detailed instructions.
Finalize settings
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW
discs recorded on this recorder in Video
mode. You need to do this if you want to
record more material or edit material already
on the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR
mode discs which have been finalized on
other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc
the message This disc cannot be recorded.
Undo the finalization. is displayed, use
this command to be able to record on the
disc using this recorder.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo
Finalize’ then ‘Start’.
Optimize HDD
Finalize
HDD
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the
HDD file system gradually becomes
fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need
optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so
that the disc can be played on a regular DVD
player or computer equipped with a suitable
DVD-ROM drive.
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.
This is only necessary if you want to a player
to display a title menu for the disc.
See Playing your recordings on other DVD
players on page 49 for detailed instructions.
When the HDD needs optimizing the
recorder will automatically display a
message recommending optimization.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as
eight hours. During optimization,
playback and recording are not possible.
• Cancelling optimization mid-way does
not undo the optimization already done,
so the HDD will be partly optimized.
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also,
once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
101
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 102 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
12
The Disc Setup menu
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
‘Start’.
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then
Disc Setup
Basic
Optimize HDD
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
A progress bar indicates how long there is
left to go. If no actions are carried out for
more than 20 minutes after the optimization
process is completed, the unit turns itself
off.
Initialize HDD
HDD
When your HDD/DVD recorder is working
without a problem this option is not visible in
the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD
file system becomes corrupted for some
reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will
erase all the data on it.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
‘Start’.
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Initialize HDD
Optimize
HDD
102
En
Initialize HDD
Start
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 103 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Video Adjust menu
13
Chapter 13
The Video Adjust menu
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up
the picture quality for the built-in tuner and
external inputs, for disc playback, and for
recording.
Setting the picture quality
for TV and external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of
picture quality settings for the built-in TV
tuner and for each external input. There are
several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your
own sets.
Important
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown
in this manual are for the Taiwan and
Philippines model.
• Tuner – suitable for general TV
broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital
broadcasts and Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR
or DTV/LDP).
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you
can save your own set of picture quality
settings.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,
2 or 3).
Choosing a preset
ENTER
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
1
With the recorder stopped, press
to display the Home Menu.
2ch
Memory1
Detailed Settings
ENTER
2
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
ENTER
3
adjust.
ENTER
3
Select a preset.
2ch
Tuner
Detailed Settings
Select the setting you want to
Memory1
Prog. Motion
2ch
Motion
PureCinma
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch
between the built-in TV tuner and the
external inputs.
• Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to
change the channel of the built-in TV
tuner.
There are six presets available:
3-D Y/C
Still
Auto
Motion
Still
YNR
Off
Max
CNR
Off
Max
Detail
Off
White AGC
Max
Off
You can adjust the following settings:
103
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 104 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
13
The Video Adjust menu
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and
still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the
picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set
to Auto, but try switching to Off if the
picture appears unnatural.
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour
separation.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)
component.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges
appear.
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic
white level adjustment.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of
white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of
black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard
reference black level (525 Input Line
System only).
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between
red and green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the
colours appear.
ENTER
4
setting.
Adjust the currently selected
HOME
MENU
5
Press to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other
input or the built-in TV tuner.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust
different settings, press ENTER after
selecting the setting you want to adjust.
104
En
Setting the picture quality
for disc playback
This setting determines how the picture will
look when playing discs.
Choosing a preset
HOME
MENU
1
With a disc playing (or paused),
press to display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
ENTER
3
Select a setting.
TV
Detailed Settings
There are six presets available:
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray
tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for plasma display
screens
• Professional – suitable for professional
monitors
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or
Professional).
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 105 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Video Adjust menu
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you
can save your own set of picture quality
settings for disc playback.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,
2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select
‘Detailed Settings’.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
3 Select the picture quality setting you
want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Motion
PureCinma
Still
Auto1
YNR
Off
BNR
Off
Max
Max
MNR
Off
Max
Sharpness
Soft
Fine
Detail
Soft
Fine
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and
still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is
ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the
picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set
to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2,
On or Off if the picture appears
unnatural.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the block noise
(artefacts visible in areas of flat colour,
caused by MPEG compression).
13
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito
noise (artefacts visible around the edges
of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of
the high-frequency (detailed) elements
in the picture. Sharpness is ineffective
for HDMI output.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges
appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of
white. White Level is ineffective for HDMI
output.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of
black. Black Level is ineffective for HDMI
output.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard
reference black level. Black Setup is
ineffective for HDMI output.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the
brightness of darker images. Gamma
Correction is ineffective for HDMI
output.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between
red and green. Hue is ineffective for
HDMI output.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the
colours appear. Chroma Level is
ineffective for HDMI output.
4 Use the / buttons to adjust the
currently selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you
want them, press HOME MENU to exit.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust
different settings, press ENTER after
selecting the setting you want to adjust.
105
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 106 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Chapter 14
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture,
language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and
recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of
inactivity.
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and
the clock will be set automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal
in your area, you can set the time and date manually.
Display
Set preferences for time and date display format.
Basic
Clock Setting
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System
525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external
input.
625 System
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
Taiwan and Philippines model: Default setting is 525 System. Other: Default setting is 625 System.
See also About the input line system on page 117 for more information on this setting.
Power Save
(except Taiwan and
Philippines model)
On
No antenna input signals are passed through to the
outputs when the recorder is in standby.
Off •
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving
at the antenna inputs are passed along to the
outputs.
HELP Setting
On •
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI
displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI
displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually
display the Help screen.)
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also
Switching on and setting up on page 30.
Setup Navigator
106
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 107 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Initial Setup menu
14
Options
Explanation
Auto Channel
Setting
(Taiwan and
Philippines model)
Antenna •
Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It
takes a few moments for the auto tuning to
complete.
Cable
Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few
moments for the auto tuning to complete.
Auto Channel
Setting
(Other)
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen, select your country, then
wait for automatic tuning to complete. The channel
mapping screen should appear when the recorder is
set up. Press ENTER to exit this screen.
Manual CH Setting
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any
of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your
country, then proceed to the manual channel setting
screen:
• Change channel presets using the PREV /
NEXT buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no
station assigned to that channel), change the Skip
setting to On.
• Set the CH System setting to match the channel
system of your country or region (except Taiwan and
Philippines model).
• Set the Channel setting to the channel you want to
assign to the current channel preset (except Taiwan
and Philippines model).
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT
setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.
• Set the Sound System setting to match the
sound system of your region (except Taiwan and
Philippines model).
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to
five characters for the current channel preset ( except
Taiwan and Philippines model).
Channel Swapping
(except Taiwan and
Philippines model)
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel
assignments of different presets so that you can
group together presets that naturally go together.
Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.
G-Code CH Setting
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to assign channel
numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in
your TV guide to see which channel numbers should
be assigned to which guide channels. Press ENTER
when your done to leave this screen.
Setting
Tuner
107
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 108 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour
system for the external input and the built-in TV
tuner. Use the CH +/– buttons to change the preset.
On the default Auto setting the recorder can
generally correctly detect whether the input signal is
PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some
cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is
displayed incorrectly.
Video In/Out
Input Colour
System
See also About the input colour system on page 117 for more information on this setting.
Component Video
Out
Interlace •
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with
progressive-scan video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan
compatible. Check the operating instructions that
came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.
• If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any
picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel
to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 114 to the default setting).
• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
NTSC on PAL TV
On
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Off •
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating
instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 117 for related information.
Audio In
NICAM Select
(except Taiwan and
Philippines model)
NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
(You can still switch the audio to record using the
AUDIO button before recording.)
Tuner Level
(except Taiwan and
Philippines model)
External Audio
Normal •
Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is
excessive, causing distortion.
Stereo •
Select if the audio from the currently selected
external input is standard stereo.
Dual Mono/
Bilingual
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder
whether the audio is stereo or dual mono/bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
108
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 109 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Dual Mono
Recording
(Taiwan and
Philippines model)
L•
Select to record the left channel of an external dual
mono source when recording to DVD in Video mode,
to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video
Mode On, or in LPCM mode.
R
As above, but for right channel recording.
When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the
one you want on playback.
Bilingual Recording A/L •
(Other)
B/R
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source
when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format
set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in
LPCM mode, from an external source.
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format
set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you
want on playback.
DV Input
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during
the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two
stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Mix
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the
two stereo audio tracks.
Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital
source is being played.
Dolby Digital PCM
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output.
Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a
Dolby Digital decoder.
On •
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being
played.
Off
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is
being played. Use when your connected equipment
doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the
analog audio outputs.
Audio Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96 kHz PCM Out
96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz
output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t
support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is
being played.
109
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 110 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
MPEG Out
MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using
MPEG audio is being played.
MPEG PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM
output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t
have an MPEG audio decoder.
On
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control).
Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low
volume.
Off •
Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby
Digital.
Language
OSD Language
•
(Taiwan and
Philippines model)
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to
Chinese.
English •
(Other)
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to
English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the onscreen displays.
Audio Language
Chinese •
(Taiwan and
Philippines model)
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video
playback to Chinese.
English •
(Other)
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video
playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the
default audio language for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to
something other than the ones listed. See Selecting
other languages for language options on page 118.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language
preference.
110
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 111 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Subtitle Language
Chinese •
(Taiwan and
Philippines model)
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video
playback to Chinese.
English •
(Other)
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video
playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the
default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to
something other than the ones listed. See Selecting
other languages for language options on page 118.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle
Language preference.
Auto Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your
default language will play using that language,
without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default
language but that have a subtitle track in your default
language will play the original audio track with
subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your
audio and subtitle language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same
language.
DVD Menu
Language
w/Subtitle
Language •
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same
as that set for the subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the
default language for DVD-Video menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something
other than the ones listed. See Selecting other
languages for language options on page 118.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to
your Subtitle Language and Auto Language
preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive
subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
111
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 112 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
On (go to setup)
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to
MN32, LPCM and XP+ modes can be set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP
and SEP) can be set.
Recording
Manual Recording
See also Manual recording modes on page 120 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is
automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media
if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the
recording will not fit even at MN1 (MN4 for DVD+R/
+RW), then the recording will be made to the HDD
in the original quality selected.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the
selected media, the recording starts but is cut off
when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set.
Set Thumbnail
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc
Navigator to the first frame of the title.
30 seconds
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into
the title.
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes
into the title.
Auto Chapter
(HDD/VR)
On •
When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD,
chapter marks are added at the black screen
between commercials and main programming.
When recording in DV, chapter marks can be
changed by date/time.
Off
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
Auto Chapter
(Video)
No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are
inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
112
En
No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in DVD+R/+RW or in real-time
copying, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 113 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
HDD Recording
Format
Video Mode Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode.
Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the
recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with
Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if
you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy
can be used.
• Taiwan and Philippines model: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to
record when recording a broadcast with a SAP channel. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be
recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 109.
• Other: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a
bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between
them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 109.
• When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format.
Playback
TV Screen Size
4:3 (Letter Box)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the
letter box format presentation for widescreen
material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the
pan and scan presentation for widescreen material.
16:9 •
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV
settings determine how 4:3 material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that
format as some discs override this setting.
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto •
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still
image.
On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the
accuracy of the edit points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited
points during playback of a VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
113
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 114 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Parental Lock
Set Password
In order to change the parental lock level or change
the country/area code, set the password using this
option. From the following screen, enter a four-digit
number that will be your password.
Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your
existing password and then a new one from the
following screen.
Change Level
From the following screen, first enter your password
and then set a parental lock level.
Country/Area
Code
From the following screen, first enter your password
and then set a country/area code. See Country/Area
code list on page 131.
Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features
the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See
Resetting the recorder on page 134.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle
scenes on a DVD-Video disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle
scene is showing.
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen Resolution
1920 x 1080p
Constant 1920 x 1080p output.
1920 x 1080i
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.
1280 x 720p
Constant 1280 x 720p output.
720 x 576p
(720 x 480p)
Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input
Line System to 525 System, video is output in 720 x
480p).
720 x 576i
(720 x 480i)
Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input
Line System to 525 System, video is output in 720 x
480i).
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this
case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this
also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the default setting).
• If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2, you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i).
4:3 Video Output
114
En
Full
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the
aspect ratio.
Normal
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change
the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on
each side.
14 Initial_Settings.fm 115 ページ 2007年3月27日 火曜日 午前10時2分
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Colour
RGB (0–255)
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’
on the RGB (16–235) setting.
RGB (16–235)
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the
black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.
YCbCr 4:2:2
The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2
component signal. This is the standard setting for
HDMI-compatible devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4
The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4
component signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.
• You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i).
Audio Output
Auto •
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a
bitstream signal. However, depending on the Audio
Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMIconnected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.
PCM
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM
(except DTS).
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with
bitstream audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
HDMI Control
On •
Enable the HDMI Control function. Select this option
when connected to an HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma display, AV system (amplifier or AV
receiver etc.).
Off
Disable the HDMI Control function. Select this option
when not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible
component, or when connected to a component
manufactured by a company other than Pioneer.
• For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 22.
• This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device.
• For more information see Troubleshooting on page 126.
Options
On Screen Display
On •
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play,
etc.) on-screen.
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display On •
Off
The time is shown in the front panel display when the
recorder is in standby.
The front panel display is switched off in standby.
115
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 116 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Remote Control
Mode
If you are using more than one recorder in the same
Recorder 1–3
(default: Recorder 1) room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the
recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press
and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.
DivX VOD
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code.
See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivX®
VOD content on page 11.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick Preview •
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video
plays short excerpts from throughout the selected
title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally
from the beginning.)
Normal
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the
title.
Restart USB
Device
If the connected USB device does not respond to the
recorder, try using this option to restart it. If the
device still does not work properly try switching it off
then back on, and/or disconnecting then
reconnecting the USB cable.
Confirm Printer
Use this option to confirm the make and model of the
printer connected to the recorder (does not work with
all printers).
Proceed
Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when
playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise
produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound
quality. When you wake the HDD back up it will take
a few seconds to load.
The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any
number of actions, including:
• Turning the power off and on again.
• Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the
HDD.
• When a timer recording begins.
• When you try and make any changes to system
settings.
Options 2
USB
(DVR-650H-S/
DVR-550H-S only)
HDD Sleep Mode
116
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 117 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
The Initial Setup menu
Additional information about the
TV system settings
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL,
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems.
The Input Line System and Input Colour
System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an
external input or the built-in TV tuner.
Please note the following points when
changing the input line system:
• If, when the Input Line System setting is
changed, the screen goes blank (due to
incompatibility with your TV), you can
switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel (Stop) button then
pressing INPUT SELECT (also front
panel) while the recorder is stopped.
• When you switch the Input Line System
setting the Copy List is erased. If you
switch the setting using the (Stop)
button and INPUT SELECT buttons as
described above, there is no
confirmation, so please use with care.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV
line systems on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the Input
Colour System setting also changes
(page 117).
14
About NTSC on PAL TV
Depending on the Input Line System setting
and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal
format output when the recorder is stopped
varies as shown in the table below.
Input Line
System
Output
NTSC on PAL
when
TV
stopped
625 System
Off
PAL
On
PAL
Off
NTSC
On
PAL–60
525 System
About the input colour system
The available options of the Input Colour
System setting depend on the Input Line
System setting. The tables below show the
different options available.
Taiwan and Philippines model:
Input Line
System
Built-in tuner
External
input
625 System
n/a
Auto
PAL
SECAM
525 System
3.58 NTSC
Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
117
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 118 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
14
The Initial Setup menu
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area
model:
Input Line
System
Built-in tuner
External
input
625 System
Auto
Auto
PAL
PAL
SECAM
SECAM
n/a
Auto
525 System
Selecting other languages
for language options
ENTER
1
Select ‘Other’ from the
language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD
Menu Language, Audio Language, and
Subtitle Language.
3.58 NTSC
ENTER
PAL–60
2
want.
Select the language you
Other:
Initial Setup
Input Line
System
External
Built-in tuner
input
OSD
Tuner
Audio Language
Language
Subtitle Language
Number
Auto Language
Video In/Out
Audio In
625 System
525 System
Auto
Auto
PAL
PAL
SECAM
SECAM
3.58 NTSC
Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Additional information about
component video output
If you switch the Component Video Out
setting to Progressive when using a TV that
is not compatible with progressive-scan
video, you will not be able to see anything
displayed on your TV. If this happens, press
and hold the (Stop) button on the front
panel, then press OPEN/CLOSE. This will
set the recorder’s video output back to
Interlace.
118
En
DVD Menu Language
Basic
Audio Out
Language
Language
English
0
5
1
4
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Recording
Playback
• Select by language name: Use the /
buttons to change the language.
• Select by code number: Press then
use the number buttons to enter the
four-digit language code.
See Language code list on page 131 for a list
of available languages and corresponding
codes.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 119 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
Chapter 15
Additional information
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc
manufacturer for compatibility.
Rec mode
DVD disc type
SEP
SLP
EP
LP
SP
XP
10 h
8h
6h
4h
2h
1h
DVD-R / 1x
DVD-RW / 1x
1x
6 mins.
7.5 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
DVD-RW / 2x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM / 2x
2x
3 mins.
4 mins.
5 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
DVD+R / 2.4x
DVD+RW / 2.4x
DVD+R DL
2.4x
*1
*1
*1
6.3 mins.
12.5 mins.
25 mins.
DVD-RAM / 3x
DVD-RAM / 5x
3x
2 mins.
2.5 mins.
3.5 mins.
5 mins.
10 mins.
20 mins.
DVD-R / 4x
DVD-RW / 4x
DVD+R / 4x
DVD+RW / 4x
4x
1.5 mins.*1
2 mins.*1
2.5 mins.*1
4 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
DVD-R / 8x / 16x
DVD+R / 8x / 16x
DVD-RW / 6x
DVD+RW / 8x
6x
1.25 mins.*1
1.6 mins.*1
2.2 mins.*1
3 mins.
5.5 mins.
11 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc
being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may
be made at 2x speed).
119
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 120 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each
manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording
time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 135.
Level
Resolution*2
Single-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-RAM
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD-RAM
VR mode (DVD-R DL)
Dual-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R DL
DVD+R DL
MN 1 *3,4
802 mins. 1440 mins.
MN 2 *3,4
720 mins. 1292 mins.
MN 3 *3,4
MN 4
*4
SEP
600 mins. 1077 mins.
SLP
480 mins.
861 mins.
420 mins.
754 mins.
360 mins.
646 mins.
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
--- mins.
538 mins.
484 mins.
431 mins.
413 mins.
395 mins.
377 mins.
359 mins.
341 mins.
323 mins.
305 mins.
287 mins.
269 mins.
251 mins.
233 mins.
215 mins.
197 mins.
188 mins.
179 mins.
170 mins.
161 mins.
153 mins.
144 mins.
135 mins.
126 mins.
117 mins.
111 mins.
111 mins.
--- mins.
MN 5 *4
MN 6 *4
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
XP+*5
*1
Rec. time*1
EP
LP
SP
XP
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD+R/+RW
Video mode (DVD-R DL)
DVD+R DL
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.
The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
*3 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*4
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
*5
XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded
in MN32 mode.
*2
120
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 121 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
• Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
• Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is
in Linear PCM format.
• See also Recording on page 33.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is
something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the
trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical
appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem
Remedy
The disc is
automatically ejected
after closing the disc
tray
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 133).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can’t eject a disc
• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold OPEN/CLOSE
on the front of the unit for more than three seconds.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 133).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up).
• Press HDD/DVD to select the DVD.
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for
an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a
Line System different to the current recorder setting.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copyonce protected recordings will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been
initialized (page 50). This can take up to an hour.
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to
the correct input.
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible
TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel
(Stop) button then pressing OPEN/CLOSE.
• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
121
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 122 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the
recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before
unplugging the power cord.
Remote control does
not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the
CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to
use (page 14).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder
(page 116). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is
automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 6).
• Replace the batteries (page 6).
No sound or sound is
distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and
the volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or
slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS
decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a
suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out >
DTS Out setting is On.
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In
this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a dual
mono/bilingual
programme
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels.
The main and sub channels are both output.
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 117). (You can also
change it by pressing the (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the
front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)
122
En
The picture from the
external input is
distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected,
you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly
to your TV.
Screen is stretched
vertically or
horizontally
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 113) is correct for
the kind of TV you have (see also page 132).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically
according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not
compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 123 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Can’t play a disc
recorded using this
recorder on another
player
• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R,
make sure that it’s finalized (page 49).
• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when
recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be
specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on nonCPRM compatible players (page 35).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded
material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the
picture is dark or
distorted
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not
display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Recorded contents are
not clear or artefacts
appear in areas of flat
colour (due to MPEG
compression; also
known as block noise)
• Change the recording mode to XP/SP.
15
Can’t record or does
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
not record successfully • For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t
already finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254
chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 100).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC,
etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc
must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also
necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want
to record (page 117).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer programme
doesn’t record
successfully
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the
recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW,
programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a
VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 35).
• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the
earlier one will record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
• Check that the recorder’s TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) settings are
the same as the channel set for recording.
123
En
15 Additional_Information.fm 124 ページ 2007年3月27日 火曜日 午前10時5分
15
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
After briefly
unplugging or after a
power failure the front
panel display shows
‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other
settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After
unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for some
five years from the date it was shipped from the factory. Reset the
clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again.
• To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 46).
Front panel display
shows ‘LOCKED’ when
a button is pressed
124
En
Can’t use One Touch
Copy (HDD to DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some
free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.
Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD+R, the
disc isn’t finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some
free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of
remaining recordable titles may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that
there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once
protected, One Touch Copy will not work.
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the
One Touch Copy feature can’t be used.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when
copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles
when copying to DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch
Copy (DVD to HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there
are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to
the HDD.
The device connected
to the USB port is not
recognized
(DVR-650H-S/
DVR-550H-S only)
• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 24).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.
• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup
menu (page 116).
• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are
connected at the same time, it’s possible that only the first device
connected to this recorder will be recognized.
File names are not
displayed properly.
• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not
display correctly on this unit.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 125 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
HDMI
Problem
Remedy
The connected HDMI or
DVI device does not
display any picture
(and the front panel
HDMI indicator does
not light)
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the
power of both components is on).
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next,
switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds,
then switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the
following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a nonstandard cable may result in no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single
cable to connect devices together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p,
1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x
1080i/p) video input.
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no
HDMI output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the
HDMI output
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not
be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE
while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch
the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to
the default setting).
There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
the connected HDMI or • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with
DVI device
the manual that came with the connected device).
The power
• This unit’s power may be turned on each time you turn on the power
automatically turns on for a connected plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be
turned on in this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to OFF (page 115).
Can’t record video
• When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the
channel information for the plasma television matches that of this
unit. If the channel information does not match you cannot make
recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this unit’s
channel information (page 107).
125
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 126 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
HDMI Control does not • Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 21).
respond
• Make sure that this unit’s HDMI Control is set to ON (page 115).
• Make sure that the connected component’s HDMI Control is set to
ON. For more information, refer to the operating manual of your
plasma television or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.).
• This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders
connected to a single plasma television or AV system. For more
information refer to the operating manual of your plasma television or
AV system.
• Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as
immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, change
connection settings, turn this unit’s power off or remove the
power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you
experience any problems, turn the HDMI control for all connected
units ON and check the video output from this unit.
• Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or
not.
• Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Controlcompatible components other than those made by Pioneer. When
using HDMI-Control compatible components manufactured by
companies other than Pioneer, set the HDMI Control to Off
(page 115).
• This unit will not function properly with AV systems that do not
support HDMI Control, or when connected with AV systems other
than those made by Pioneer.
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect
the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control
buttons stop working
• Press (Stop) then try restarting
playback.
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON
button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If
the power fails to switch off, press and
hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds
until the power switches off.
126
En
STANDBY/ON
DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
DivX
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
COPY
USB
STOP REC
CH
INPUT
SELECT
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 127 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
On-screen displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a
moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region
number for the recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management
data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or
the maximum number of chapters and/or titles
has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or
combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo
the finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD
recorder. Undo the finalization in order to
recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to
the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization
successfully.
• Could not undo finalization
successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the
disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the
disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a
new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc,
please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This
display may also appear if the disc is dirty or
damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not
CPRM compatible.
• Cannot record this content using
Video mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to
DVD+R/+RW.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR
mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be
recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM
information. The recorder may be damaged —
please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
127
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 128 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
128
En
Additional information
Message
Explanation/Action
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display
appears when the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a
power cut. The contents of the recording will be
lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has
exceeded the operating limit. If this message
reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry
out repairs.
• HDD optimization is recommended.
This can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD
housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording
performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization.
This can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in
order to maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently
optimized. Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after
optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not
enough free space on the HDD for optimization to
complete properly. Please erase some titles from
the HDD and optimize again.
• An error occurred. Please consult the
service center. Note that contents on
the HDD may be erased when servicing
this unit..
This message is displayed when information from
the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be
damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest
Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to
carry out repairs.
• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect.
Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize.
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new
recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD
(page 102) may result in your being able to make
recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD
will erase all recorded contents, including
protected files.
• There is no DV input or the input
signal is unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in
the connected camcorder.
• No DV camcorder connected.
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the
camcorder is switched off.
• You cannot connect more than one
DV camcorder at a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to
just one camcorder.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.
Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back
on again.
15 Additional_Information.fm 129 ページ 2007年3月27日 火曜日 午前10時47分
Additional information
15
Message
Explanation/Action
• Could not operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder was not able to operate the DV
camcorder.
• The DV camcorder is not set for
playback. Please select playback mode
on the DV camcorder.
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to
playback mode.
• The printer is not ready or is not
connected. Please check the printer.
This message is displayed when communication
could not be established with the printer. See the
Troubleshooting section if you do not know the
cause.
• Printing has been cancelled
because ...
This message is displayed when there is a printer
error during printing. After checking the printer for
the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer
and start the printing job again, or select “Yes” to
resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print
job). See also the operating instructions that came
with your printer for possible causes of print errors.
Front-panel displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• E01
The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask
your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or
your dealer to carry out repairs.
• E02
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new
recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD
(page 102) may result in your being able to make
recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD
will erase all recorded contents, including
protected files.
129
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 130 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
Additional information
Setting up the remote to
control your TV
Maker
Code
Alba
66
You can use the supplied remote to control
your TV. To be able to use this feature you
first have to program the remote with a
maker code from the table below.
Bush
76
Fisher
61, 65
Fujitsu
77
1 Press and hold down the CLEAR
button, then enter the maker code for
your TV.
The LED indicator on the remote controls
lights.
Funai
67
Goldstar
79
Grandiente
87
See the table below for the list of maker
codes. If there is more than one code given
for your make, input the first one in the list.
Grundig
51, 82
Hitachi
56, 60, 83, 86
ITT
70
Mitsubishi
59
Nokia
53, 81
Panasonic
58, 72
Philips
57, 85, 89
Pioneer
50, 80
RCA
68
Salora
71
Samsung
73, 75
Sanyo
74
Sei
78
Sharp
52
Sony
54
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t
appear in the table below, you will not be
able to use this remote to control your
TV.
2 Press TV to check that the remote
works with your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV
should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is
another code given for your maker, repeat
step 1 with a new code.
Using the TV remote control
buttons
The table below shows how to use this
remote control with your TV.
130
En
Button
What it does
TV
Press to switch the TV on/off
(standby)
INPUT SELECT
Press to change the TV’s
video input
Tandy
69
Telefunken
64
TV VOLUME
Use to adjust the TV volume
Thomson
62, 89
TV CHANNEL
Use to change TV channels
Toshiba
55
JVC
63
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 131 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Greek (el), 0512
Polish (pl), 1612
Czech (cs), 0319
Norwegian (no), 1415
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Korean (ko), 1115
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm),
1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
131
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 132 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
Additional information
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
The programme is shown in widescreen with
black bars at the top and bottom of the
screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the programme are cropped so
that the picture fills the whole screen.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The programme is presented correctly on
either setting.
4:3
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
132
En
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The programme is presented in widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the picture is
presented — check the manual that came
with the TV for details.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 133 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
15
Handling discs
Damaged discs
When holding discs of any type, take care
not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on
the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or
by the center hole and edge.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.
If you can see that a disc is cracked,
chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged,
don’t risk using it; you could end up
damaging the recorder.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback
and recording performance. Take care also
not to scratch the label side of the disc.
Although not as fragile as the recorded side,
scratches can still result in a disc becoming
unusable.
This recorder is designed for use with
conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of
shaped discs is not recommended for this
product. Pioneer disclaims all liability
arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
Should a disc become marked with
fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft,
dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the
center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with
a circular motion.
Cleaning the pickup lens
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol,
or a commercially available CD/DVD
cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.
Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning
agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more
durable than vinyl records, you should still
take care to handle and store discs correctly.
When you’re not using a disc, return it to its
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs
in excessively cold, humid, or hot
environments (including under direct
sunlight).
Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the
disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other
sharp-tipped writing instrument. These
could all damage the disc.
The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not
become dirty in normal use, but if for some
reason it should malfunction due to dust or
dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized
service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not
recommend using them since some may
damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder
if it is brought into a warm room from
outside, or if the temperature of the room
rises quickly. Although the condensation
won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this
reason you should leave it to adjust to the
warmer temperature for about an hour
before switching on and using.
For more detailed care information see the
instructions that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the
recorder.
133
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 134 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
Additional information
Hints on installation
Moving the recorder
We want you to enjoy using this unit for
years to come, so please bear in mind the
following points when choosing a suitable
location for it:
If you need to move the recorder, first
remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc
tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON to switch
the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes
off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly,
disconnect the power cord. Never lift or
move the unit during playback or recording
— discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such
as a table, shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high
temperatures or humidity, including near
radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Resetting the recorder
Place on a window sill or other place
where the recorder will be exposed to direct
sunlight.
1 Make sure that the recorder is on.
2 Using the front panel controls, press
and hold (Stop) and press STANDBY/
ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or
in a room where it will be exposed to
excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or
other component in your stereo system that
becomes hot in use.
Use near a television or monitor as you
may experience interference — especially if
the television uses an indoor antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the
recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover
with cloth — this may prevent proper cooling
of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that
is not large enough to support all four of the
unit’s feet.
134
En
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to
all its factory settings.
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 135 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
Additional information
Specifications
General
Power requirements
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption
DVR-650H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 W
DVR-550H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 W
DVR-450H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 W
Power consumption in standby mode
(Front panel display: off)
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.51 W
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.33 W
Weight
DVR-650H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg
DVR-550H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg
DVR-450H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 kg
Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 75 mm (H) x 288 mm (D)
Operating temperature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
Operating humidity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
TV system
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,
DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW
(WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD
DVR-650H-S (250 GB)
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h
15
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 36 h to 711 h
DVR-550H-S (160 GB)
XP+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 23 h to 455 h
DVR-450H-S (80 GB)
XP+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 11 h
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 11 h to 227 h
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m
Timer
Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes
Clock
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock
(12-hour digital display1)
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock
(24-hour digital display)
Note
1 If the country is set to Philippines the clock switches to 24 hour display.
135
En
DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 136 ページ 2007年3月20日 火曜日 午後12時19分
15
Additional information
Tuner
Input/Output
Receivable channels
Taiwan and Philippines model:
VHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ch to 13 ch
UHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ch to 69 ch
CATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 ch to C125 ch
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω
(F-shape connector)
Other . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (IEC connector)
Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack
Video Output 1, 2
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack
S-Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN
S-Video Output 1, 2
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
Audio Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) L/R
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
Audio Output 1, 2 L/R
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
Other connections
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Digital audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
USB (DVR-650H-S and DVR-550H-S only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model :
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G
Hyper
UHF
Channel
E2 to E4
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12
S1 to S20
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
Hyper
UHF
302 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
PAL I
Frequency
44 MHz to 89 MHz
Channel
A to C
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
Channel
R1 – R5
R6 – R12
S1 – S20
S21 – S41
E21 – E69
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Taiwan, Philippines model :
NTSC-M/N
VHF
UHF
CATV
Frequency
Channel
55 MHz to 218 MHz
2 to 13
471 MHz to 808 MHz 14 to 69
72 MHz to 806 MHz C1 to C125
STEREO
M/N - BTSC
Other:
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G
Hyper
UHF
Channel
E2 to E4
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12
S1 to S20
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
Hyper
UHF
302 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
VHF
UHF
CATV
Frequency
Channel
55 MHz to 218 MHz
2 to 13
471 MHz to 808 MHz 14 to 69
72 MHz to 806 MHz C1 to C125
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
PAL I
Frequency
44 MHz to 89 MHz
Channel
A to C
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
Supplied accessories
Channel
R1 – R5
R6 – R12
S1 – S20
S21 – S41
E21 – E69
NTSC-M/N
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
M/N - BTSC
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Operating Instructions
Note: The specifications and design of this product are
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.
This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced
by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
136
En
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with
permission from Microsoft Corporation.
00 Cover_back_TLTFWPW_EN.fm 1 ページ 2007年2月23日 金曜日 午前11時41分
HDD/DVD RECORDER
HDD/DVD Recorder
Operating Instructions
DVR-650H-S
DVR-550H-S
DVR-450H-S
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
TM
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
Operating Instructions
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
Printed in China
K002_B_En
<VRB1463-A>

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement